453463

Pentax K-5 Manual

15
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/383
Next page
Operating Manual
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
58192 Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
H02-201011 Printed in Philippines
HOYA CORPORATION
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe Imaging
Systems S.A.S.
(European Headquarters)
112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE
(HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)
PENTAX Imaging Systems
GmbH
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,
GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX Imaging Systems
Limited
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401,
U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, Arizona 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX Canada Inc. 1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
PENTAX Trading
(SHANGHAI) Limited
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
http://www.pentax.jp/english
For optimum camera performance, please read the
Operating Manual before using the camera.
Operating Manual
SLR Digital Camera
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX X Digital Camera. Please read this manual
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions.
Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the
camera’s capabilities.
Lenses you can use
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J
lenses and lenses that have an s (Auto) position on the aperture ring. To use any other
lens or accessory, see p.59 and p.337.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken using the X that are for anything other than personal enjoyment
cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright
Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking
pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items
on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used
outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care
should be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
PENTAX, X and smc PENTAX are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility and SDM are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The DNG logo is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies. However, the TM or ® marks are not used in all cases in this
manual.
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled
digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more
faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
1
To users of this camera
•
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage
the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely high
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this
manual are different from the actual ones.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a
Macintosh hereafter.
• In this manual, the term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries used for this
camera and its accessories.
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product,
we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following symbols.
Warning
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present
inside the camera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the
camera, never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Wrapping the strap around your neck is dangerous. Take care that small
children do not hang the strap around their necks.
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens
attached, as viewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun
directly with a telephoto lens may lead to a loss of eyesight.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop
use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your
nearest PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause
a fire or electric shock.
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may
burn yourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration
may occur.
For Using Your Camera Safely
Warning
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause
serious personal injuries.
Caution
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
About the Camera
2
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low
temperature burns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be
careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or
mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the
camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality,
stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.
Warning
•
Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this
product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC
adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger
or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric
shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical
shock.
•
If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service
Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger and AC
plug cord, unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continuing to use the
product can cause damage to the equipment, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated
dust may cause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord
set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end
with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA
configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector
body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.
Caution
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord.
Doing so may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged,
consult a PENTAX Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the
cord is plugged in.
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric
shock.
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
3
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause
equipment breakdown.
•
Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable
lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may
cause an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.
Warning
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not
rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention
immediately.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may
cause an explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an
explosion or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins
to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts
of the battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an
explosion or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes,
it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with
water.
• Precautions for D-LI90 Battery Usage:
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
- DO NOT INCINERATE.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C)
Warning
•
Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally it may cause serious
personal injuries.
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.
About the Battery
Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of
the Reach of Small Children
4
3.
To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory
Cards from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of
small children.
Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is
accidentally swallowed.
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included
in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still
working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a
wedding or when traveling). Contents of recording cannot be guaranteed if
recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not
possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media (SD
Memory Card), etc.
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance.
Avoid storing in high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the
battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s usage life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the
battery charger D-BC90. Do not use it with other devices.
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not
leave the camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a
cushion to protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles,
or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal
at normal temperatures.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to
liquid crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.
•
Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside
of the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove the
camera after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera
About the Battery and Charger
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera
5
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salt.
These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any
rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause it to break or
malfunction.
•
Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or
benzine.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder.
Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the
CMOS sensor. (This will involve a fee.)
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera.
Remove the camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated
place.
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain
high performance.
• Refer to “Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card” (p.56) regarding the
SD Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting
an SD Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. It
is the user’s responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.
Cleaning Your Camera
Storing Your Camera
Other Precautions
Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration, which
can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website.
Refer to p.325 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.
6
For Using Your Camera Safely.............................................................1
Care to be Taken During Handling .......................................................4
Contents ...............................................................................................6
Composition of the Operating Manual ................................................13
Before Using Your Camera 15
X Characteristics ................................................................. 16
Checking the Contents of the Package...................................... 18
Names and Functions of Working Parts .................................... 19
Capture Mode.....................................................................................20
Playback Mode ...................................................................................22
Display Indicators ........................................................................ 24
Monitor................................................................................................24
Viewfinder ...........................................................................................35
LCD Panel ..........................................................................................37
How to Change Function Settings.............................................. 39
Using the Direct Keys .........................................................................39
Using the Control Panel......................................................................40
Using the Menus.................................................................................42
Using the Mode Dial..................................................................... 45
Getting Started 47
Attaching the Strap ...................................................................... 48
Inserting the Battery .................................................................... 49
Charging the Battery...........................................................................49
Inserting/Removing the Battery ..........................................................50
Battery Level Indicator ........................................................................52
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time
(Battery Fully Charged).......................................................................52
Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ........................................................53
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card .................................. 55
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level.....................................................57
Attaching a Lens .......................................................................... 59
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ............................................... 61
Turning the Camera On and Off.................................................. 62
Contents
7
Initial Settings .............................................................................. 63
Setting the Display Language.............................................................63
Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................67
Basic Operations 69
Basic Shooting Operation........................................................... 70
Holding the Camera............................................................................70
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings ..............................71
Using a Zoom Lens...................................................................... 76
Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................... 77
Setting the Flash Mode.......................................................................77
Compensating for Flash Output..........................................................82
Playing Back Pictures ................................................................. 83
Playing Back Images ..........................................................................83
Deleting a Single Image......................................................................84
Shooting Functions 87
How to Operate the Shooting Functions ................................... 88
Direct Keys Setting Items ...................................................................88
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items ..........................................................89
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items ...................................................91
Setting the Exposure ................................................................... 93
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed.................................................93
Setting the Sensitivity .........................................................................95
Reducing Image Noise (Noise Reduction)..........................................98
Changing the Exposure Mode ..........................................................100
Selecting the Metering Method .........................................................117
Adjusting Exposure...........................................................................119
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)............................121
Focusing ..................................................................................... 122
Using the Autofocus..........................................................................122
AF Fine Adjustment ..........................................................................126
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)............................................127
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock).......................................................130
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus).................................132
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before
Shooting (Preview) .................................................................... 135
Selecting the Preview Method ..........................................................135
Displaying the Optical Preview .........................................................137
Displaying the Digital Preview ..........................................................138
8
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera
Shake .......................................................................................... 139
Using the Shake Reduction Function ...............................................139
Shooting with Self-timer....................................................................143
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional) .........................................145
Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function .......................................149
Taking Pictures Continuously .................................................. 151
Continuous Shooting ........................................................................151
Interval Shooting...............................................................................152
Multi-exposure ..................................................................................155
Shooting while Adjusting the Settings (Auto Bracketing) ..... 157
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically Changed (Exposure
Bracketing)........................................................................................157
Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings
(Extended Bracketing) ......................................................................160
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters........................................ 162
Shooting with Live View ............................................................ 165
Setting Live View ..............................................................................166
Taking a Still Picture .........................................................................168
Recording Movies ...................................................................... 171
Changing the Movie Settings............................................................171
Connecting a Microphone.................................................................173
Recording Movies .............................................................................174
Playing Back Movies.........................................................................177
Editing Movies ..................................................................................179
Using the Flash 181
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode ....................... 182
Using the Slow-speed Sync..............................................................182
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync ........................................................184
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash ........... 185
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash............................... 186
Using an External Flash (Optional) .......................................... 187
Using P-TTL Auto Mode ...................................................................188
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode................................................189
Using Flash in Wireless Mode ..........................................................190
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.....................194
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords...............................195
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash ............................................................196
X-sync Socket...................................................................................197
9
Shooting Settings 199
Setting a File Format ................................................................. 200
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels ...................................................200
Setting the JPEG Quality Level ........................................................201
Setting a File Format ........................................................................202
Setting the White Balance......................................................... 205
Fine-tuning the White Balance..........................................................207
Adjusting the White Balance Manually .............................................208
Adjusting the White Balance with Color Temperature ......................210
Setting the Color Space....................................................................212
Saving the White Balance Setting of a Captured Image...................213
Correcting Images ..................................................................... 214
Adjusting Brightness .........................................................................214
Lens Correction ................................................................................218
Adjusting the Composition ................................................................220
Setting the Image Finishing Tone............................................. 222
Setting Custom Image ......................................................................222
Setting Cross Processing .................................................................225
Storing Frequently Used Settings ............................................ 227
Saving the Settings...........................................................................227
Checking the Saved USER Settings.................................................229
Using Saved USER Settings ............................................................230
Changing the Settings ......................................................................231
Resetting to Default Settings ............................................................232
Playback Functions 233
Playback Functions Operation ................................................. 234
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items ...............................................234
Playback Menu Setting Items ...........................................................235
Setting the Playback Display Method ...................................... 236
Enlarging Images ....................................................................... 237
Displaying Multiple Images....................................................... 238
Multi-image Display Screen..............................................................238
Displaying Images by Folder ............................................................239
Displaying Images by the Shooting Date (Calendar Display)...........240
Comparing Images ...........................................................................241
Joining Multiple Images (Index)........................................................243
Playing Back Images Continuously ......................................... 246
Setting the Slideshow Display ..........................................................246
Starting the Slideshow ......................................................................247
10
Rotating Images ......................................................................... 249
Deleting Multiple Images ........................................................... 250
Deleting Selected Images.................................................................250
Deleting a Folder ..............................................................................252
Deleting All Images...........................................................................253
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect).............................. 254
Protecting a Single Image.................................................................254
Protecting All Images........................................................................255
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device................................. 256
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal...........................256
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal..................................258
Processing Images 261
Changing the Image Size .......................................................... 262
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
(Resize) ............................................................................................262
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) .........................................263
Processing Images with Digital Filters .................................... 265
Applying the Digital Filter..................................................................267
Recreating Filter Effects ...................................................................268
Searching for the Original Image......................................................270
Developing RAW Images........................................................... 271
Developing One RAW Image............................................................271
Developing Multiple RAW Images ....................................................272
Specifying the Parameters................................................................274
Changing Additional Settings 277
How to Operate the Set-up Menu.............................................. 278
Set-up Menu Setting Items ...............................................................278
Formatting the SD Memory Card.............................................. 281
Customizing Buttons and Dials ................................................ 282
Setting the Function for the E-dials...................................................282
Setting the Function for the Buttons .................................................285
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display Language...... 288
Setting the Beep ...............................................................................288
Changing the Date and Time Display ...............................................289
Setting the World Time .....................................................................289
Setting the Display Language...........................................................292
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display .......................... 293
Setting the Text Size.........................................................................293
11
Setting the Guide Display Time ........................................................293
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed .............................................294
Setting the Status Screen Display ....................................................295
Setting the Display for Instant Review..............................................296
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor............................................297
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor ....................................................298
Setting the Electronic Level Display .................................................299
Setting the Folder/File Number................................................. 300
Changing the Naming System of the Folder.....................................300
Creating New Folders.......................................................................300
Selecting the File Number Setting ....................................................301
Setting the File Name .......................................................................302
Selecting the Power Settings.................................................... 304
Setting the Auto Power Off Function ................................................304
Selecting a Battery............................................................................305
Setting the Photographer Information ..................................... 307
Setting the DPOF Settings ........................................................ 309
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor
(Pixel Mapping) .......................................................................... 311
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory) .............. 312
Connecting to a Computer 315
Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer ...................... 316
Saving Images on Your Computer ........................................... 317
Setting the USB Connection Mode...................................................317
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera and Your Computer ...318
Using the Provided Software .................................................... 320
Installing the Software ......................................................................320
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4..............................322
Appendix 327
Default Settings.......................................................................... 328
Resetting the Menus .................................................................. 335
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menus ...........................335
Resetting the Custom Menu .............................................................336
Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations .......... 337
Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]..................................................339
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor....................................................... 340
Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations (Dust Removal)..............340
12
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)........................................................................................341
Removing Dust with a Blower...........................................................343
Optional Accessories ................................................................ 345
Error Messages .......................................................................... 351
Troubleshooting......................................................................... 354
Main Specifications ................................................................... 356
Glossary...................................................................................... 362
Index............................................................................................ 367
WARRANTY POLICY.................................................................. 373
13
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
Composition of the Operating Manual
1 Before Using Your Camera
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of
various parts.
2 Getting Started
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to
read this chapter and follow the instructions.
3 Basic Operations
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.
4 Shooting Functions
Explains the shooting-related functions.
5 Using the Flash
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.
6 Shooting Settings
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file
format.
7 Playback Functions
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting pictures.
8 Processing Images
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, applying digital filters and
developing images taken in RAW format.
9 Changing Additional Settings
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor
display settings and the image file naming convention.
10 Connecting to a Computer
Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
11 Appendix
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various
resources.
1
5
4
3
2
6
10
9
8
7
11
14
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
1
Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.
Indicates useful information.
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.
1 Before Using Your
Camera
Check the package contents and the names and functions
of working parts before use.
X Characteristics ..........................................16
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ............19
Display Indicators ................................................24
How to Change Function Settings ......................39
Using the Mode Dial .............................................45
16
Before Using Your Camera
1
X Characteristics
• Features a 23.7×15.7 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 16.28
million effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with
minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.
• Features an AF sensor with 11 focusing points. The central 9 focusing
points are wide cross area sensors.
•
Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera, with
a magnification of approximately 0.92 and field of view of approximately
100%, for easier manual focusing. Also features a superimpose function
in which the active AF point(s) on the viewfinder illuminate red.
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, a
wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for
high-precision viewing performance.
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in
real-time on the monitor.
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the lens properties. The
camera can also output composite and HDMI video signals so that you
can watch recorded images and movies on a TV or high-quality monitor.
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the
camera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use
menus make the camera easier to operate.
• The body exterior is magnesium alloy, and the dials, buttons, joints, and
retractable parts of the camera are dust-proof and water-resistant.
• Features Dust Removal function to shake the CMOS sensor and
remove the collected dust.
•
Features Hyper-program and Hyper-manual modes that let you take
pictures with the intended exposure. Also features Sensitivity Priority mode
K
that automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed according to the
set sensitivity, and Shutter & Aperture Priority mode
L
that automatically
adjusts sensitivity according to the set aperture and shutter speed.
• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.
You can use digital filters such as Color or Soft while taking pictures or
to process images after taking them.
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while
previewing the end result of the edited image, enabling a wider range of
photographic expression.
Before Using Your Camera
1
17
• Records images in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in
both formats simultaneously. When the file format of the last captured
image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, you can
additionally save the image in RAW format. RAW images can be easily
processed internally by the camera.
• Up to five setting patterns can be saved in A mode. In addition,
functions for the |/Y button and the e-dials can also be
customized, enabling speedy operation by any type of photographer.
• Supports the optional Battery Grip D-BG4 with vertical shutter release
button. If a battery (D-LI90) is inserted in both the camera and grip, the
battery with more power is prioritized. This enables you to get the best
camera performance for an extended period. A menu item also allows
you to prioritize a battery and use its full power before switching to the
other battery.
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the X and 35 mm SLR
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format sizes for 35 mm film
and CMOS sensor are different.
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor
35 mm film : 36×24 mm
X CMOS sensor : 23.7×15.7 mm
The focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera is about 1.5 times longer
than that of the X. To shoot images with an angle of view framing the same
area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm
camera
150÷1.5=100
Use a 100 mm lens with the X.
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the X by 1.5 to
determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the X
300×1.5=450
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.
Shake Reduction (SR)
Shake Reduction (SR) on the X features a PENTAX original
system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high
speeds, compensating for camera shake.
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken,
such as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
18
Before Using Your Camera
1
Checking the Contents of the
Package
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.
Check that all accessories are included.
Hot shoe cover FK
(Installed on camera)
Eyecup F
R
(Installed on camera)
ME viewfinder cap
Sync socket 2P cap
(Installed on camera)
Body mount cover
(Installed on camera)
Triangular ring and
protective cover
(Installed on camera)
USB cable
I-USB7
AV cable
I-AVC7
Strap
O-ST53
Rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI90
Battery charger
D-BC90
AC plug cord
Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110
Operating Manual
(this manual)
19
Before Using Your Camera
1
Names and Functions of Working
Parts
* In the first illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK
removed.
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover F
K and
the Eyecup F
R removed.
Tripod socket
Battery cover
Self-timer lamp
/Remote control receiver
AF coupler
Mirror
Lens unlock button
Lens information
contacts
Card cover
Battery cover
unlock knob
Battery grip contacts
Strap lug
Hot shoe
Lens mount index
Card access
lamp
Built-in flash
PC/AV terminal
DC input terminal
LCD Panel
Terminal cover
Cable release
terminal
Self-timer lamp/
Remote control
receiver
X-sync socket
Diopter adjustment
lever
mini HDMI terminal
(Type C)
Microphone terminal
Strap lug
AF assist light
Microphone
Speaker
Viewfinder
Image plane
indicator
Monitor
20
Before Using Your Camera
1
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.
Capture Mode
1 m button
Turn the rear e-dial (S)
while pressing this button to
set the EV compensation
value. (p.119)
2 o button
Turn the rear e-dial (S)
while pressing this button to
set the ISO sensitivity. (p.95)
3 Shutter release button
Press to capture images.
(p.72)
4 Main switch
Move to turn the power on/off
(p.62) or to preview (
p.135
).
5 Front e-dial (R)
Changes the settings.
6 Lens unlock button
Press to detach a lens. (p.60)
6
2
c
b
g
h
i
j
k
m
9
8
d
f
e
l
7
4
3
a
0
5
1
Before Using Your Camera
1
21
7 E button
Press to pop up the built-in
flash. (p.79)
8 Mode dial lock button
Press to allow the mode dial to
be turned. (p.45)
9 Mode dial
Switches the exposure
modes. (
p.45)
0 Metering mode
switching lever
Changes the metering
method. (p.117)
a |/Y button
You can assign a function to
this button. (p.285)
b Focus mode lever
Switches between autofocus
modes (
l
/
k
) (p.122)
and manual focus mode
(p.132).
c Q button
Switches to Playback mode.
(p.83)
d M button
Turns the status screen
display on the monitor on/off.
(p.25)
Switches to the control panel
when the status screen is
shown. (p.27)
e Rear e-dial (S)
Changes the settings.
f L button
Records the exposure before
shooting (p.121) and saves a
preview image.
g | (Green) button
Sets the exposure mode to
Automatic Exposure and
resets the settings.
h AF point switching dial
Sets the focusing area.
(p.127)
i = button
Sets the focusing area and
temporarily provides manual
focus. (p.124)
j U button
Displays a Live View image.
(p.165)
k 4 button
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed,
press this button to confirm
the selected item.
When the AF point switching
dial is set to j (Select),
press this button to enable or
disable changing the AF point.
(p.128)
22
Before Using Your Camera
1
Functions of buttons, dials and lever used during playback are noted.
l Four-way controller
(2345)
Displays the Drive Mode/Flash
Mode/White Balance/Custom
Image setup menu. (p.88)
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed, use
this to move the cursor or
change items.
When the AF point switching dial
is set to
j
(Select), use this
to move the AF point. (p.128)
m 3 button
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu (p.89). Next, press the
four-way controller (5) to
display other menus.
Playback Mode
6
0
a
c
7
5
8
b
3
2
4
1
9
Before Using Your Camera
1
23
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the four-
way controller are referred to in the following way.
1 m button
Press in the enlarged view to
increase the magnification.
(p.237)
2 Shutter release button
Press halfway to switch to
Capture mode.
3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.62) Set to the |
position to switch to Capture
mode and preview.
4 Front e-dial (R)
Use this to display the next or
previous image.
5 i button
Press to delete images. (p.84)
6 Q button
Press to switch to Capture
mode.
7 M button
Press to display the shooting
information on the monitor.
(p.29)
8 Rear e-dial (S)
Use this to change the
magnification in the enlarged
view (p.237) or display
multiple images at the same
time (p.238).
9 L button
When the file format of the last
captured image is JPEG, and
its data still remains in the
buffer memory, press this
button to additionally save the
image in RAW format. (p.84)
0 | (Green) button
Press in the enlarged view to
decrease the magnification.
(p.237)
a 4 button
Confirms the setting you
selected in the menu screen
or playback screen.
b Four-way controller
(2345)
When a menu screen or
playback screen is displayed,
use this to move the cursor or
change items.
Press the four-way controller
(3) to display the playback
mode palette. (p.234)
c 3 button
Press to display the
[Q Playback 1] menu
(p.235). Next, press the four-
way controller (5) to display
other menus.
References to Button Names
24
Before Using Your Camera
1
Display Indicators
The various information
appears on the monitor
depending on the status of the
camera.
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the
camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.
* 3 appears only when [World Time] is set to [Destination].
Monitor
The brightness and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.297, p.298)
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial
1 Exposure Mode (p.100) 3 World Time (p.289)
2 Guide indicator 4 Current date and time (p.67)
• Select [Off] for [Guide Display] in the [R Set-up 1] menu to not show guides.
(p.293)
• When the mode dial is set to A, the screen for selecting the USER mode
is displayed for 30 seconds regardless of the [Guide Display] setting.
Monitor
P
Program
Automatic Exposure
09/09/2010
RAW Tv
Av
Cancel AF
10:30AM
RAW
AF
P
1
2
34
Before Using Your Camera
1
25
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current
shooting function settings. You can change the type of the screen
displayed by pressing the M button.
Capture Mode
[Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
(p.299)
P
AF.S
1/
ISO
AUTO
2000 2.8
±0.0
±0±0
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
16M
[
37
]
1600
JPEG
11
11
16M
[
37
]
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
ISO
AUTO
200-1600
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
11
Status screen
M
Control panel
Blank
M
M
M
Electronic level display
26
Before Using Your Camera
1
Status screen
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may
differ.)
1 Exposure Mode (p.100) 13 EV Compensation (p.119)/
Exposure Bracketing (p.157)
2 AE Lock (p.121)
3 Interval Shooting (p.152)/Multi-
exposure (p.155)/Extended
Bracketing (p.160)/Digital Filter
(p.162)/HDR Capture (p.215)
14 EV bar
15 Flash Mode (p.77)
16 Drive Mode (p.88)
17 White Balance (p.205)
4 Shake Reduction (p.140)/
Horizon Correction (p.140)
18 Custom Image (p.222)
19 File Format (p.202)
5 Focus Mode (p.122) 20 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.200)
6 Metering Method (p.117) 21 JPEG Quality (p.201)
7 Battery level (p.52) 22 Flash Exposure Compensation
(p.82)
8 E-dial guide
9 Shutter speed 23
White Balance fine-tuning (p.207)/
Cross Processing (p.225)
10 Aperture value
11 ISO/ISO AUTO 24 AF point (p.127)
12 Sensitivity (p.95) 25 Remaining image storage
capacity/| button guide
1 234567
109
12
22
23
24
25
11
8
8
13
8
15 16 17
19 20 21
18
14
8
P
USER
SHIFT
AF.S
1/
ISO
AUTO
2000
1600
2.8
+1.0
G1A1
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
JPEG
16
M
[
1234
]
11
11
Before Using Your Camera
1
27
Control panel
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change
settings.
1 Function name 10 Digital Filter (p.162)
2 ISO AUTO Setting (p.96) 11 HDR Capture (p.215)
3 AUTO AF Point Setting (p.127) 12 File Format (p.202)
4 Highlight Correction (p.214) 13 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.200)
5 Shadow Correction (p.214) 14 JPEG Quality (p.201)
6 Distortion Correction (p.218) 15 Shake Reduction/
Horizon Correction (p.140)
7 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Adjustment (p.218)
16 Current date and time
8 Cross Processing (p.225) 17 Remaining image storage
capacity
9 Extended Bracketing (p.160)
• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be
selected.
• When [Status Screen] (p.295) in the [R Set-up 1] menu is set to P (Off), the
status screen is not displayed. The control panel turns on and off each time
the M button is pressed.
• On the status screen, the setting currently being changed or guide display for
the buttons that can be operated are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen]
(p.295) in the [R Set-up 1] menu is set to [Display Color 1]).
• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30
seconds. Press the M button to display it again.
• If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status
screen will reappear.
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed on
the status screen and in the control panel. Even if the number of recordable
images is 10,000 or more, [9999] is displayed.
1
2
9
13
8
12
16 17
10
14
11
15
5467
3
16M
[
37
]
ISO
AUTO
200-1600
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
11
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
28
Before Using Your Camera
1
Electronic level display
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether
the camera is level. When [Electronic Level] is set to O (On), press
the M button while the control panel is displayed to view the
electronic level. When [Electronic Level] is assigned to the |/Y
button, press the |/Y button to switch the display on/off.
A bar graph indicating the horizontal camera angle appears at the
bottom of the screen, and a bar graph indicating the vertical camera
angle appears on the right side.
Example:
• [Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu. (p.299)
• Refer to p.285 for assigning a function to the |/Y button.
• The electronic level display will disappear if no operations are made
within 1 minute.
• If the camera angle cannot be detected, both ends and the center of
the bar graphs flash red.
Horizontally and vertically
level (green)
Tilted 1.5° to the left (yellow)
Vertically level (green)
Outside horizontal level
display (red)
Tilted 5° up (yellow)
Horizontally level (green)
Outside vertical level
display (red)
Before Using Your Camera
1
29
The camera switches the types of information display when you press the
M button during playback.
Playback Mode
Standard Captured image, file format, and guides are displayed.
Histogram display
Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are
displayed. Not available during movie playback. (p.32)
Detailed
information display
Detailed information on how and when the image was taken
is displayed. (p.30)
No info. display Only captured image is displayed.
When holding the camera vertically
If the camera is held vertically while measuring
the brightness, the status screen or control
panel is displayed vertically. The directions of
the four-way controller (2345) also change
to match the orientation of the camera.
To always display the contents of the screen
horizontally, set in [Status Screen] of the [R
Set-up 1] menu. (p.295)
[
1234
]
ISO
AUTO
200-1600
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
16M
JPEG
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
11
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2000 F5.6
JPEG
1/
100-0001
100-0001
RAW
RAW
200
ISO
AE-L
P
09/09/2010
10:00AM
100-0001
1/
2000
AF.A
16
M
G2
200
ISO
2
4
m
m
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
JPEG
AdobeRGB
A1
F2.8 +1.5 -0.5
ON
ON
ON
ON
2000 F5.6 200
100-0001
100-0001
1/
ISO
RAW
RAW
AE-L
Standard
M
Histogram display
No info. display
M
M
M
Detailed information display
30
Before Using Your Camera
1
Detailed information display
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.
The type of information display that is shown first during playback is the same
as that of the last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is
set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.312) of the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu, the [Standard]
screen is always displayed first when the camera is turned on.
P
09/09/2010
10:00AM
09/09/2010
10:00AM
100-0001
1/
2000
AF.A
16
M
G2
200
ISO
24
mm
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
JPEG
AdobeRGB
A1
F2.8
F2.8
+1.5 -0.5
100-0001
100-0001
G2MONO
Movie
10
min
10
sec
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
A1
OFF
OFF
FullHD
25
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
3
2
2
2
3
546
5
34
35 36
37 14 38
6
7
30
8
9
10
11 12
13 14 15 16 19
20
20
1817
21
24
24
25
25
26 27 28 29
2826 27 4
31
30
31
3332
32
22
23
1
56
39
40
41
39
1
Page 1
Still Picture
Movie
Still Picture/Movie
Page 2
2
3
2
3
Before Using Your Camera
1
31
* For images taken during Live View using Face Detection AF or Contrast AF,
the autofocus method is displayed for indicator 10.
* Indicators 8 and 22 appear only for images taken with the flash.
* Indicators 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 33, and 38 appear only for images taken with
the corresponding functions enabled.
* Indicators 27 and 28 do not appear for RAW images.
* Indicator 39 appears only for images whose information was tampered.
1 Rotation information (p.249) 20 Aperture value
2 Captured image 21 EV Compensation (p.119)
3 Exposure Mode (p.89) 22 Flash Exposure Compensation
(p.82)
4 Shake Reduction/
Horizon Correction (p.140)
23 Sensitivity (p.95)
5 Protect (p.254) 24 White Balance (p.205)
6 Folder number-File number
(p.300)
25 White Balance fine-tuning (p.207)
26 File Format (p.202)
7 Drive Mode (p.88) 27 Recorded Pixels (p.171, p.200)
8 Flash Mode (p.77) 28 Quality Level (p.171, p.201)
9 Focal Length 29 Color Space (p.212)
10 AF point (p.127)/
Autofocus Method (p.166)
30 Image finishing tone (p.222)
31 Custom Image parameters
(p.222)
11 Focus Mode (p.122)
12 Metering Method (p.117) 32 Shooting date and time
13 Shutter speed 33 DPOF settings (p.309)
14 Digital Filter (p.162) 34 Recording time
15 Extended Bracketing (p.160)/
HDR Capture (p.215)/
Multi-exposure (p.155)/
Cross Processing (p.225)
35 Sound setting (p.172)
36 Sound type
37 Drive Mode (Remote Control)
38 Cross Processing (p.225)
16 Highlight Correction (p.214) 39 Information tampering warning
17 Shadow Correction (p.214) 40 Photographer (p.307)
18 Distortion Correction (p.218) 41 Copyright Holder (p.307)
19 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Adjustment (p.218)
32
Before Using Your Camera
1
Histogram display
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Press
the four-way controller (23) to switch between “Brightness histogram”
and “RGB histogram”.
* Indicator 2 appears only for protected images.
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is
JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory. (p.84)
1 Histogram (Brightness) 7 Shutter speed
2 Protect 8 Aperture value
3 Folder number-File number 9 Sensitivity
4 Additionally saving in RAW
format
10 DPOF settings
11 Histogram (R)
5 Switch RGB histogram/
Brightness histogram
12 Histogram (G)
13 Histogram (B)
6 File Format
If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.236) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to O (On),
areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when in RGB histogram
display and Detailed information display).
2000 F5.6 200
100-0001
100-0001
1/
2000 F5.6
100-0001
100-0001
1/
ISO
200
ISO
RAW
RAW
AE-L
RAW
RAW
AE-L
97 8 10 6 7 8 9 106
5
11
4
12
13
5
1
1 32432
Brightness histogram RGB histogram
23
23
Before Using Your Camera
1
33
A histogram shows the brightness
distribution of an image. The
horizontal axis represents brightness
(dark at the left and bright at the right)
and the vertical axis represents the
number of pixels.
The shape and the distribution of the
histogram before and after shooting
tells you whether the exposure level
and contrast are correct or not, and
lets you decide if you need to adjust the exposure and take a picture again.
1 Adjusting Exposure (p.119)
1 Adjusting Brightness (p.214)
Understanding Brightness
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly bright or dark
areas, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is
on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with
no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off
(bright portions with no detail).
Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor
when [Bright/Dark Area] is O (On).
1 Playing Back Images (p.83)
1 Setting the Playback Display Method (p.236)
1 Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.296)
Understanding Color Balance
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB
histogram. The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have
White Balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that
color is too intense.
1 Setting the White Balance (p.205)
Using the Histogram
← Number of pixels
Dark portions Bright portions
(Dark) ←Brightness→ (Bright)
Dark image Image with few bright or
dark areas
Bright image
34
Before Using Your Camera
1
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,
buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.
Example:
Guide Indicators
2 Four-way controller (2) 4 button
3 Four-way controller (3) | Green button
4 Four-way controller (4) L button
5 Four-way controller (5) i button
R Front e-dial Shutter release button
S Rear e-dial |/Y button
3 button
Before Using Your Camera
1
35
The following information appears in the viewfinder.
Viewfinder
1 AF frame (p.61)
2 Spot metering frame (p.118)
3 AF point (p.127)
4 Flash indicator (p.77)
Lit: when the flash is available.
Blinks: when the flash is recommended but not set or is being charged.
5 Focus Mode (p.132)
Appears when the focus mode is set to \.
6 Shutter speed
Underlined when the shutter speed can be adjusted.
Displays a countdown of processing time when the Noise Reduction
function is activated. (p.98)
7 Aperture value
Underlined when the aperture value can be adjusted.
[nr] blinks when the Noise Reduction function is activated. (p.98)
8 Focus indicator (p.72)
Lit: when the subject is focused.
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.
9 EV bar
Displays the EV compensation values or difference between the
appropriate and current exposure values when the exposure mode is set to
a or M. (p.119)
Displays the camera angle when [Electronic Level] is O (On). (p.38)
1
4
19
181716151413
61011
12
2
1
3
5 7 8 9
36
Before Using Your Camera
1
10 ISO/ISO AUTO
Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.
11 Sensitivity/Remaining image storage capacity
Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted.
Displays the number of recordable images immediately after shooting.
Displays the compensation value while adjusting the EV compensation.
Displays the amount of deviation from the correct exposure when the
exposure mode is set to a or M and [Electronic Level] is set to O (On).
(p.114)
12 AE Lock (p.121)
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.
13 Changing AF point (p.128)
Appears when the AF point can be changed with the AF point switching dial
set to j (Select).
14 Multi-exposure (p.155)
Appears when Multi-exposure is set.
15 Metering Method (p.117)
Appears when the metering method is M (Center-weighted metering) or
N (Spot metering).
16 Shake Reduction (p.139)
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
17 Flash Exposure Compensation (p.82)
Appears when the flash exposure compensation is in use.
18 EV Compensation (p.119)/Exposure Bracketing (p.157)
Appears when adjusting the EV compensation or when the drive mode is
set to [Exposure Bracketing].
19 File Format (p.202)
Displays the image save format in RAW/RAW+ format.
Not displayed in JPEG format.
• The AF point(s) in use for autofocus appear in red (Superimpose AF Area)
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.127)
• When [Cancel AF] is assigned to [AF Button] in [Button Customization] of the
[A Rec. Mode 5] menu, \ is displayed in the viewfinder while the =
button is pressed. (p.124)
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed
in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,
[9999] is displayed.
Before Using Your Camera
1
37
The following information appears in the LCD panel on top of the camera.
LCD Panel
1 Shutter speed/
Countdown of Noise Reduction
processing time (p.98)
11 Flash Mode (p.77)
b : Built-in flash is ready
(when blinking, flash
should be used)
2 Aperture value
nr :
Noise Reduction is
activated (p.98)
> :Red-eye Reduction
3 : Auto Flash Discharge
3 Multi-exposure (p.155) Q : Slow-speed Sync
4 Mirror Lock-up Shooting (p.149) E : Trailing Curtain Sync
5 EV bar (p.119)/
Electronic Level (p.38)
w :Wireless
12 Drive Mode (p.88)
6 EV Compensation (p.119)/
Exposure Bracketing (p.157)
9 : Single Frame Shooting
j : Continuous Shooting
7 Battery level (p.52) g : Self-timer Shooting
8 Flash Exposure Compensation
(p.82)
W :
Remote Control Shooting
13 File Format (p.202)
9 Sensitivity/EV compensation
value
1 :RAW capture
1P: RAW+JPEG capture
10 ISO/ISO AUTO 14 Remaining image storage
capacity/USB Connection mode
(p.317)
Appears when the sensitivity is
displayed.
Pc-S :MSC mode
Pc-P :PTP mode
LCD panel is illuminated when the exposure metering is performed. You can
choose [High], [Low] or [Off] for LCD panel backlight in [22. LCD Panel
Illumination] of the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.92).
2
1
5
7
6
8
9
10
4
141312
3
11
38
Before Using Your Camera
1
Electronic level display
When the camera is not level, a bar graph indicating the horizontal
camera angle is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
• [Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu. (p.299)
• The composition can also be adjusted in the camera when the camera
is stabilized using a tripod. (p.220)
When level (at 0°)
When tilted 5° to the left
When held vertically and tilted 3° to the right
39
Before Using Your Camera
1
How to Change Function Settings
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or
menus. Some functions can be changed using both the control panel and
menus.
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.
In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance and
Custom Image by pressing the four-way controller (
2345
). (p.88)
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.
1
Press the four-way controller (3)
in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a flash mode.
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Using the Direct Keys
Flash Mode
Flash On
Cancel
MENU
0.0
OK
OK
40
Before Using Your Camera
1
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.
Following, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.
1
Check the status screen and then
press the M button.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status
screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select an item you
want to change the setting for.
You cannot select items that cannot be
changed in a given camera status.
While direct key operation is enabled, the guide indicators for the direct keys
are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen] (p.295) in the [R Set-up 1] menu
is set to [Display Color 1]). Direct key operation is not available when the AF
point switching dial is set to j and the AF point is being changed. In such
cases, press and hold the 4 button. (p.129)
Using the Control Panel
P
AF.S
1/
ISO
AUTO
2000 2.8
±0.0
±0±0
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
16M
[
37
]
1600
JPEG
11
11
16M
[
37
]
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
ISO
AUTO
200-1600
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
11
Before Using Your Camera
1
41
3
Use the front e-dial (R) or rear
e-dial (S) to change the
setting.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the status screen
and is ready to take a picture.
• Press the 4 button in Step 3 to display the detailed setting screen for the
selected item. Make the detailed settings for functions such as Extended
Bracketing and Digital Filter on the detailed setting screen.
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View
(p.165) is displayed. Make or change necessary settings in the [A Rec.
Mode] menu in advance.
16M
[
37
]
JPEG Quality
ISO
AUTO
200-1600
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
11
42
Before Using Your Camera
1
This section explains how to use the menus: [A Rec. Mode],
[Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.
Following, how to set [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu is
explained as an example.
1
Press the 3 button in
Capture mode.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on
the monitor.
If the
3
button is pressed in
Playback mode, the [
Q
Playback 1]
menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
twice or turn the rear e-dial (S)
two clicks to the right (toward
y).
Each time the four-way controller (5) is
pressed, the menu will change in the
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],
[A Rec. Mode 5], [Q Playback 1] … [A Rec. Mode 1].
When the front e-dial (R) is turned to the right, the menu will change
in the following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 1], [Q Playback 1],
[R Set-up 1], [A Custom Setting 1].
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose an item.
Using the Menus
JPEG
Exit
MENU
1 2345
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
Lens Correction
16M
11
Exit
MENU
123 45
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format PEF
sRGB
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
AUTO
Before Using Your Camera
1
43
4
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Available settings are displayed.
The frame moves to the pop-up menu if
there is one. When there is a submenu, it
is displayed.
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a setting.
6
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Press the 3 button if a submenu is
displayed.
Next, set other items.
7
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your
settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by
removing the battery while the camera is on).
Exit
MENU
123 45
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format PEF
sRGB
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
AUTO
123 45
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format PEF
sRGB
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
ON
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
44
Before Using Your Camera
1
• You can select whether to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or
to always display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.294)
• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.
•[A Rec. Mode] menu 1p.89
•[Q Playback] menu 1p.235
•[R Set-up] menu 1p.278
•[A Custom Setting] menu 1p.91
45
Before Using Your Camera
1
Using the Mode Dial
You can switch the exposure modes by setting the icons on the mode dial
to the dial indicator.
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock button.
Mode Characteristics Page
A
Lets you capture images with the saved exposure
mode. Up to five settings can be saved.
p.227
B
Green
Lets you capture images with fully automatic
settings.
p.103
e
Hyper-program
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to
Program Line when taking pictures. You can use
the front and rear e-dials to switch between shutter
priority and aperture priority.
p.104
K
Sensitivity Priority
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to the
set sensitivity.
p.105
b
Shutter Priority
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for
expressing the movement of the subject.
p.107
c
Aperture Priority
Lets you set the desired aperture value for
controlling the depth of field.
p.109
L
Shutter & Aperture
Priority
Automatically sets the sensitivity to obtain a proper
exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture
value according to the brightness of the subject.
p.110
a
Hyper-manual
Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value
to capture the picture with creative intent.
p.112
Mode dial lock button
Dial indicator
Mode dial
46
Before Using Your Camera
1
p
Bulb
Lets you capture images that require slow shutter
speeds such as fireworks and night scenes.
p.115
M
Flash X-sync
Speed
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 second. Use
this when using an external flash that does not
automatically set the sync speed.
p.116
C
Movie
Use this to record movies. p.174
Mode Characteristics Page
2 Getting Started
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the
instructions.
Attaching the Strap ..............................................48
Inserting the Battery ............................................49
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card ...........55
Attaching a Lens ..................................................59
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ........................61
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................62
Initial Settings .......................................................63
48
Getting Started
2
Attaching the Strap
1
Pass the end of the strap through
the protective cover and
triangular ring.
2
Secure the end of the strap on the inside of the clasp.
3
Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as
described above.
49
Getting Started
2
Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery into the camera. Use only a D-LI90 battery.
When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been
used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the
battery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
2
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
3
Face the 2 mark on the exclusive battery up and insert it
into the battery charger.
The indicator lamp is lit during charging and turns off when the battery is
fully charged.
4
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from
the battery charger.
Charging the Battery
Lithium-ion battery
Battery charger
Indicator lamp
AC plug cord
3
1
2
50
Getting Started
2
When using the battery for the first time, charge the battery and insert it into
the camera.
1
Open the battery cover.
Lift the battery cover unlock knob, turn it
towards OPEN (1) to unlock, and then
pull the cover open (2).
•
Do not use the provided battery charger D-BC90 to charge batteries other than
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Charging other batteries may cause
damage or heating.
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but the
indicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Use a new battery in the camera.
• The maximum charging time is approximately 390 minutes (it depends on
temperature and remaining battery power.) Charge in a location where the
temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.
• If battery usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has
reached the end of its life. Use a new battery in the camera.
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The
battery may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install a new battery
after a long time has passed since the battery was removed, follow the
procedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.67).
• Insert the battery correctly. Batteries inserted incorrectly may cause a
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth
before inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is
used continuously for a long period of time.
2
1
51
Getting Started
2
2
Face the 2 mark on the battery towards outside of the
camera, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the
arrow (3) and insert the battery.
Insert until the battery locks.
To remove the battery, push the
battery lock lever in the direction
of the arrow (3) with your finger.
Remove the battery when it pops
out slightly.
3
Close the battery cover (4) and
turn the battery cover unlock
knob towards CLOSE (5) to
lock.
Stow the battery cover unlock knob after
closing the battery cover.
Use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using the camera for a
prolonged period. (p.53)
3
Battery lock lever
5
4
52
Getting Started
2
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the
w/A
displayed on the status screen and LCD panel.
The image storage capacity (normal recording, flash use 50%) is based on
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is
based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may
occur in actual use depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.
Battery Level Indicator
Status
Screen
LCD Panel Battery Level
w (Green) A Battery is full.
x (Green) B Battery is close to full.
y (Yellow) C Battery is running low.
z (Red) D lit Battery is almost empty.
[Battery depleted] D blinks
The camera turns off after displaying the
message.
(D continues blinking on the LCD
panel.)
• y, z (red), C or D may appear even when the battery level is
sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing
continuous shooting for a long period of time. In this situation, turn the
camera off and on again. If w or A appears, you can use the camera.
•
W is displayed when using the AC adapter.
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and
Playback Time (Battery Fully Charged)
Battery
Normal
Recording
Flash Photography
Playback Time
(Temperature)
50% Use 100% Use
D-LI90 (23°C) 980 740 610 440 minutes
( 0°C) 810 680 560 400 minutes
53
Getting Started
2
We recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when
using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a
computer or AV device.
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Open the terminal cover.
3
Face the 2 mark on the DC
terminal of the AC adapter
towards the 2 mark on the
camera, and connect the DC
terminal to the DC input terminal
of the camera.
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries on hand and
keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal
when returned to room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold
climates, or taking a lot of pictures.
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)
54
Getting Started
2
4
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
5
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the
AC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card
or data may be corrupted if disconnected while the card is being accessed.
• Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit K-AC50 when using the AC
adapter.
• The battery in your camera will not charge when connected to the AC
adapter.
55
Getting Started
2
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory
Card
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card
(commercially available). Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards
hereafter. Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing
the SD Memory Card.
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Slide the card cover in the
direction of the arrow and then
lift it to open (1´2).
3
Insert the card all the way with
the SD Memory Card label facing
toward the monitor.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting the
SD Memory Card” (p.281) for details on formatting.
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If a write speed
cannot keep up with a recording speed, the writing may stop during
recording.
2
1
56
Getting Started
2
Push the SD Memory Card in once to
remove.
4
Close the card cover (3) and
then slide it in the direction of the
arrow (4).
Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card
cover is open.
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being
recorded on the card, the stored data from
being deleted, and the card from being
formatted by the camera or computer.
• The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing the card immediately after
using the camera.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is
being accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away
from water and store away from high temperatures.
•
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.
We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2)
the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being
accessed.
4
3
Write-protect
switch
57
Getting Started
2
Choose the number of recorded pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data
compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the
pictures you have taken.
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more stars (
E
) are clearer when printed.
However, the number of pictures that can be taken (the number of pictures that
can be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with larger file sizes.
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other
factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of
pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) is
adequate. Set the appropriate recorded pixels and quality level depending
on how the picture will be used.
1 Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.200)
1 Setting the JPEG Quality Level (p.201)
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may
become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on
a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or
electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with other
cameras.
1 Formatting the SD Memory Card (p.281)
• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
When the File Format is JPEG
58
Getting Started
2
JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image
Storage Capacity
(When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card)
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
With the X, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high
quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select
PENTAX’s original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 2 GB SD Memory Card, you can
record up to 58 images in either PEF or DNG format.
1 Setting a File Format (p.202)
JPEG Quality
JPEG Rec. Pixels
Z
Premium
C
Best
D
Better
E
Good
p
(4928×3264) 134 214 379 749
J
(3936×2624) 208 332 585 1138
P
(3072×2048) 339 543 945 1807
i
(1728×1152) 1041 1617 2793 5121
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders containing 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracketing,
images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the
number of images exceeds 500.
When the File Format is RAW
59
Getting Started
2
Attaching a Lens
Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.
When you use one of the following lenses with the X, all the camera’s
exposure modes will be available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses
(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position, when used in the s position
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Remove the body mount cover
(1) and lens mount cover (2).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens
mount side facing upward to protect the
lens mount from damage.
3
Align the Lens mount index (red
dots; 3) on the camera and the
lens, and secure by turning the
lens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lens
counterclockwise to check that the lens is
locked in place.
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent
unexpected lens movement.
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, some
functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]”
(p.339).
• With factory default setting, the camera will not work with lenses other than
those listed above and accessories. Set [27. Using Aperture Ring] to
[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to use them. (p.339)
3
60
Getting Started
2
4
Remove the front lens cap by
pushing the indicated portions
inward.
To detach the lens, hold down the lens
unlock button (4) and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and
an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.
The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when
shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.
4
61
Getting Started
2
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter
adjustment lever sideways.
You can adjust the diopter from approximately -2.5 to +1.5 m
-1
.
1
Look through the viewfinder and
slide the diopter adjustment lever
left or right.
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the
viewfinder is focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or other
bright and consistent surface.
• The Eyecup FR is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves
the factory. Diopter can be adjusted with the Eyecup F
R attached. However,
adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
• To remove the Eyecup F
R, pull it out in the
direction of the arrow.
To attach the Eyecup FR, align it with the
groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and
push it into the position.
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image
clearly even if you use the diopter
adjustment lever, use the optional diopter
correction lens adapter M. However, the
Eyecup F
R must be removed to use this
adapter. (p.348)
AF frame
62
Getting Started
2
Turning the Camera On and Off
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera will turn on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]
to turn off the camera.
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera, turn it on again or
perform any of the following.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, 3 button or M button.
• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute of
inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu. (p.304)
63
Getting Started
2
Initial Settings
The first time the camera is turned on after
purchasing, the [
Language/u] screen
appears on the monitor. Follow the
procedure below to set the language
displayed on the monitor and the current
date and time. Once these settings are
made, you will not need to set them again
next time you turn on your camera.
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set
the date and time by following the procedure
in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.67).
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
1
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the desired
language.
Setting the Display Language
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
MENU
/
00 00
:
///
24h
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
//20100101
mm
dd yy
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
64
Getting Started
2
2
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the
selected language.
Press the four-way controller (3) twice and
proceed to Step 10 on p.65 if W
(Hometown) does not have to be changed.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to W.
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a city.
6
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.
9
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [Text Size].
Initial Setting
New York
Text Size
Settings complete
Cancel
MENU
Standard
English
Hometown
DST
New York
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
10:00
65
Getting Started
2
10
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Standard] or
[Large].
Selecting [Large] increases the text size
of the selected menu items.
11
Press the 4 button.
12
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete].
13
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set
to [Standard].
Initial Setting
New York
Text Size
Settings complete
English
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Standard
Large
MENU
Initial Setting
New York
Text Size
Settings complete
Cancel
Standard
English
OK
OK
66
Getting Started
2
When the Wrong Language is Set
If you mistakenly select the wrong language in the [Language/u]
screen and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform
the following operation to set the language back.
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and the
camera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operation from
Step 2 to set the language back.
1
Press the
3
button once to
display the guides on the monitor.
The screen shown on the right is an
example of the guides displayed. The
displayed screen will vary depending on
the selected language.
The guides appear on the monitor for 3
seconds.
2
Press the 3 button once.
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
3
Press the four-way controller (5) six times.
[R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
4
Press the four-way controller (
3
) to select [Language/
u
].
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/u] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the
desired language and press the 4 button.
The [R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]
and the current date and time as necessary.
• To change the hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.289)
• To change the date and time: “Changing the Date and Time
Display” (p.289)
• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]
screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again next time the
camera is turned on.
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselect
a language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/u] screen.
P
ίυΈρθু൲Ⴚ੄
2010/01/01
RAW P Tv
Av
AF
΅λϋΓσ
10:30AM
RAW
AF
67
Getting Started
2
Set the current date and time and the display style.
1
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose the date format.
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/
mm/dd].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select 24h (24-hour display) or
12h (12-hour display).
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
6
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Date].
Setting the Date and Time
MENU
/
00 00
:
/
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel OK
OK
//20100101
24h
//
mm
dd yy
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
/
// 2010
00 00
:
0101
/
mm
dd yy
24h
//
68
Getting Started
2
7
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the month.
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the month.
Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the camera
switches between am and pm depending
on the time.
9
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete].
10
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
If you set the date and time from the menu, the screen will return to the
[R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.
Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the settings
made up to that point and switches the camera to Capture mode. After initial
settings are complete, if the camera power is turned off before the date and
time settings are complete, the [Date Adjustment] screen will appear first next
time you turn the camera on. In this case, you can also set the date and time
from the menu later. (p.289)
• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the seconds value is set to 0. To
set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV,
radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the menu.
(p.289, p.292)
MENU
/
00 00
:
/
OK
Date Format
Date Adjustment
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
OK
24h
mm
dd yy
//20100101
MENU
00 00
:
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
OK
OK
Cancel
24h
//
//20100909
mm
dd yy
3 Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by
setting mode dial to Green mode (automatic exposure
according to the program line set to j) to ensure
successful capturing.
For information about advanced functions and settings for
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................70
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................76
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................77
Playing Back Pictures ..........................................83
70
Basic Operations
3
Basic Shooting Operation
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close
to your body.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.
Holding the Camera
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object
such as a table, tree, or wall.
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the slowest
possible shutter speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length
×1.5). For example, it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/
150 of a second for 100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function
(p.139) when using a slower shutter speed.
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of
the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.
(p.139)
Horizontal position Vertical position
71
Basic Operations
3
The X features various exposure modes, focus modes, and drive
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.
1
Set the mode dial to B.
Turn the mode dial while pressing the
mode dial lock button.
The exposure mode changes to B
(Green) mode. In B, a proper exposure
is determined by the camera and the
shutter speed and aperture value are
automatically set.
2
Set the focus mode lever to
l
.
The focus mode changes to l
(Autofocus/Single) mode. When the
shutter release button is pressed halfway
in l, the camera focuses
automatically. (p.122)
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal
Settings
Mode dial lock button
72
Basic Operations
3
3
Look through the viewfinder to
view the subject.
A zoom lens can be used to change the
size of the subject in the viewfinder. (p.76)
4
Position the subject inside the
AF frame and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The
focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when the subject comes into
focus.
AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit
location, but the flash does not pop up
automatically. If the flash is necessary,
the flash status E blinks in the viewfinder.
Press the E button to pop up the flash.
1Operating the shutter release button
(p.74)
1Subjects that are difficult to focus on
(p.75)
1Using the Built-in Flash (p.77)
1Selecting the Focusing Area (AF
Point) (p.127)
5
Press the shutter release button
fully.
The picture is taken.
This action is referred to as “releasing the
shutter” or “release”.
Focus indicator
Flash
status
73
Basic Operations
3
6
Review the captured image on
the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on the
monitor shortly after capturing (Instant
Review).
1Setting the Display for Instant
Review (p.296)
You can magnify the image during Instant
Review with the rear e-dial (S). (p.237)
You can delete the image during Instant
Review by pressing the i button.
1Deleting a Single Image (p.84)
• Refer to p.103 for details on using B (Green) mode.
• You can set the camera so that pressing the = button will focus
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button
halfway. (p.124)
• You can display the Optical Preview and check the composition, exposure,
and focus before taking pictures. (p.135)
DeleteDelete
74
Basic Operations
3
Operating the shutter release button
The shutter release button has two working positions.
Pressing it down halfway (first position) displays the indicators in the
viewfinder and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully
(second position) takes a picture.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent
camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn
where the first position and second position are.
• The viewfinder indicators are displayed while the shutter release button
is pressed halfway. The indicators are displayed for about 10 seconds
(default setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after you take
your finger off the button. (p.35, p.118)
Not pressed
Pressed halfway
(first position)
Pressed fully
(second position)
75
Basic Operations
3
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the
focusing area
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing
area
(c) Fast moving objects
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright
background)
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within
the focusing area
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the
focusing area
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode
lever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.133)
The subject may not be focused even when the ] (focus indicator) is
displayed when (e) and (f) above apply.
76
Basic Operations
3
Using a Zoom Lens
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with
a zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right or
left.
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for
telephoto and counterclockwise for wide
angle.
• The smaller the number displayed for the focal length, the wider the angle.
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.
• Power Zoom (Auto Zoom) is available if a Power Zoom compatible FA lens
is used with this camera. (p.337)
Wide Angle Telephoto
77
Basic Operations
3
Using the Built-in Flash
Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit
conditions and when you want to use the built-in flash.
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from 0.7 m to 5 m.
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the
corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the
lens being used and set sensitivity. (p.185))
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an
external flash, refer to “Using the Flash” (p.181).
Setting the Flash Mode
Flash Mode Function
C
Auto Flash
Discharge
Discharges the flash automatically in dark or backlit
conditions.
D
Auto Flash+
Red-eye Reduction
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
the automatic flash.
E
Flash On Discharges the flash for each picture.
F
Flash On+
Red-eye Reduction
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
the main flash.
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the
capture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check the
compatibility.
1 Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash (p.186)
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set the
lens aperture ring to s (Auto).
78
Basic Operations
3
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the exposure mode.
1
Press the four-way controller (3)
in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash modes that can be selected for
the set exposure mode appear.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a flash mode.
When not in B (Green) mode, turn the
rear e-dial (S) to perform the flash
exposure compensation. (p.82)
G
Slow-speed Sync
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the
brightness. For example, when using this to shoot a
portrait with the sunset in the background, both the
person and the background are captured beautifully.
H
Slow-speed Sync+
Red-eye Reduction
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
the main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.
I
k
Trailing Curtain
Sync
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the
shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they
are leaving a trail behind. (p.184)
r
Wireless Mode
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync
cord. (p.190)
Exposure Mode Selectable Flash Mode Restrictions
BC/D No flash compensation
e/c/KE/F/G/H/I/r -
b/L/a/p E/F/k/r -
ME/F/r -
A According to the saved settings
Flash Mode Function
Flash Mode
Flash On
Cancel
MENU
0.0
OK
OK
79
Basic Operations
3
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
1
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up and begins
charging. When the flash is fully charged,
E appears in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel. (p.35, p.37)
2
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
When the mode dial is at B, the flash is not discharged if the lighting
conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash is
popped up.
[Flash On] is used if the flash is popped up when the mode dial is at a
position other than B.
Using Built-in Flash
80
Basic Operations
3
3
Push down on the portion
indicated in the illustration to
retract the built-in flash.
Using Red-eye Reduction Flash
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused
by the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye.
Red-eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can
be used to combat it.
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lens
is in use.
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when
using an external flash.
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces a red-eye
effect by discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction
function, the pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is
released. This reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then
discharged while the pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.
To use the red-eye reduction function, select D in B mode, or F
or H in other modes.
81
Basic Operations
3
Daylight-Sync Shooting
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait
picture is taken with a shadow cast on a person’s face. Use of the
flash in this way is called Daylight-Sync shooting. [Flash On] is used
when shooting with Daylight-Sync shooting.
Taking pictures (in e mode)
1 Pop up the built-in flash manually and confirm that the flash
mode is set to E.
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.
3 Take a picture.
Without Daylight-Sync With Daylight-Sync
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.
82
Basic Operations
3
You can change the flash output in a range of -2.0 to +1.0. The flash
compensation values are as follows for 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV.
Set interval of steps in [1. EV Steps] (p.120) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) in the
[Flash Mode] screen.
The flash compensation value is
displayed.
Press the | button to reset the flash
output compensation value to 0.0.
Compensating for Flash Output
Step Interval Flash Compensation Value
1/3 EV
-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0
1/2 EV
-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0
• The flash output compensation cannot be set in B (Green) mode.
• N appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel during the flash exposure
compensation. (p.35, p.37)
• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will
not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.
• Compensating to the minus (-) side may not affect the image if the subject is
too close, the aperture value is small or the sensitivity is high.
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which
support P-TTL auto flash mode.
Flash Mode
Flash On
Cancel
MENU
+0.3
OK
OK
Enabling Shooting while Charging the Flash
You can set the camera to enable
shooting while the flash is being
charged.
Set [20. Release While Charging] to
[On] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.92). By default, pictures cannot be
taken while the built-in flash is charging.
Cancel
20.
1
2
Release While Charging
Off
On
Enables shutter release
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
while the built-in
flash is charging
83
Basic Operations
3
Playing Back Pictures
You can play back captured images with the camera.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera enters Playback mode and
the most recently captured image (image
with the highest file number) is displayed
on the monitor. (For movies, only the first
frame is displayed on the monitor.)
Press the M button during playback
to switch the information display such as
shooting information for the displayed
image.
Refer to p.29 for details about display
information.
2
Press the four-way controller
(45).
4 : Displays the previous image.
5 : Displays the next image.
You can also display the next or previous
image by turning the front e-dial (R).
Playing Back Images
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play back
pictures using a computer. Refer to “Using the Provided Software” (p.320) for
details on the software.
84
Basic Operations
3
You can delete images one by one.
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image to delete.
2
Press the i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
• Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.233) for details on the playback mode
functions.
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still
remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the image in RAW
format by pressing the L button during playback.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding
RAW image listed is saved.
- Multi-exposure RAW image with Multi-exposure
- Extended Bracketing RAW image with standard settings
- Digital Filter RAW image without filter effect
- HDR Capture RAW image with standard exposure
- Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing
Deleting a Single Image
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.254)
85
Basic Operations
3
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Delete].
Select a file format to delete for images
saved in RAW+ format.
4
Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
Delete JPEG
Deletes only the JPEG
image.
Delete RAW
Deletes only the RAW
image.
Delete
RAW+JPEG
Deletes images in both
file formats.
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”
(p.250).
Cancel
Delete
100-0105
100-0105
OK
OK
Memo
86
4 Shooting Functions
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced
shooting functions available with the X.
How to Operate the Shooting Functions ............88
Setting the Exposure ...........................................93
Focusing .............................................................122
Checking the Composition, Exposure and
Focus Before Shooting (Preview) .....................135
Using the Shake Reduction Function to
Prevent Camera Shake ......................................139
Taking Pictures Continuously ...........................151
Shooting while Adjusting the Settings
(Auto Bracketing) ...............................................157
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ................162
Shooting with Live View ....................................165
Recording Movies ..............................................171
88
4
Shooting Functions
How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menu or [A Custom Setting] menu.
Press the four-way controller (2345) in
Capture mode to set the following items.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.42).
Direct Keys Setting Items
Key Item Function Page
2
Drive Mode
Sets Continuous Shooting, Self-timer,
Remote Control, Exposure Bracketing
or Mirror Lock-up Shooting.
p.151
p.143
p.145
p.157
p.149
3
Flash Mode Sets the method of flash discharge. p.77
4
White Balance
Adjusts the color balance to match the
type of the light source illuminating the
subject.
p.205
5
Custom Image
Sets the image finishing tone such as
color and contrast before shooting an
image.
p.222
89
Shooting Functions
4
The following settings can be performed in
the [A Rec. Mode 1-5] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture mode to
display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items
Menu
Item Function Page
A1
USER Mode
*1
Sets the settings for A mode. p.230
Exposure Mode
*1
Sets the exposure mode when the mode
dial is set to A.
p.230
File Format
*2
Sets the file format. p.202
JPEG Recorded
Pixels
*2
Sets the recording size of images saved in
JPEG format.
p.200
JPEG Quality
*2
Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG
format.
p.201
AUTO AF Point
Setting
*2
Sets the number of AF points when the
focusing area is set to S (AUTO).
p.127
Lens Correction
*2
Corrects distortions and chromatic
aberrations occurring due to lens
properties.
p.218
A2
Cross Processing
*2
Changes the hues and contrast by
performing digital cross processing.
p.225
Extended
Bracketing
*2
Sets the Extended Bracketing shooting
settings.
p.160
Digital Filter
*2
Applies a digital filter effect when taking
pictures.
p.162
HDR Capture
*2
Enables capturing images at high dynamic
range.
p.215
Multi-exposure
Creates a composite picture by taking
multiple frames.
p.155
Interval Shooting
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set
time.
p.152
Composition Adjust.
Adjusts the composition of your image
using the Shake Reduction mechanism.
p.220
90
Shooting Functions
4
*1 Appears only when the
mode dial is set to
A
.
*2 Can also be set using the control panel.
A3
D-Range Setting
*2
Expands the dynamic range and prevents
bright and dark areas from occurring.
p.214
ISO AUTO Setting
*2
Sets the range of automatic correction in
AUTO.
p.96
High-ISO NR
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction
when shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.
p.98
Slow Shutter Speed
NR
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in
slow speed shooting.
p.99
Program Line Selects Program Line. p.102
Color Space Sets the color space to use. p.212
RAW File Format
Sets the file format of images saved in
RAW format.
p.203
A4
Movie Sets the movie settings. p.171
Live View Sets the Live View settings. p.166
Electronic Level
Sets whether to display the electronic level
which detects whether the camera is level.
p.299
Horizon Correction
Corrects the tilt (right and left) of the
image.
p.140
Shake Reduction
*2
Reduces vertical and horizontal camera
shake.
p.140
Input Focal Length
Sets the focal length when using a lens
whose focal length information cannot be
obtained.
p.142
A5
Instant Review Sets the Instant Review display settings. p.296
Digital Preview Sets the Digital Preview settings. p.136
E-Dial Programming
Sets the functions assigned to the e-dials
in each exposure mode.
p.282
Button
Customization
Sets the functions for when the |/Y
button, = button, or Preview dial is
operated, or the shutter release button is
pressed halfway.
p.285
Memory
Determines which settings to save when
the power is turned off.
p.312
Save USER Mode
Saves the current camera settings as
A.
p.227
Menu
Item Function Page
91
Shooting Functions
4
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR
camera.
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items
Menu
Item Function Page
A1
1. EV Steps Sets the adjustment steps for exposure. p.120
2. Sensitivity Steps
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO
sensitivity.
p.95
3. Expanded
Sensitivity
Expands the lower and upper sensitivity
limits.
p.95
4. Meter Operating
Time
Sets the exposure metering time. p.118
5.
AE-L
with AF
Locked
Sets whether to lock the exposure value
when the focus is locked.
p.131
6. Link AE to AF Point
Sets whether to link the exposure and
AF point in the focusing area during
multi-segment metering.
p.118
7. Auto EV
Compensation
Sets whether to compensate for
automatically when the proper exposure
cannot be determined.
-
A2
8. Auto Bracketing
Order
Sets the order for Auto Bracketing
shooting.
p.157
9. One-Push
Bracketing
Sets whether to shoot all frames with
one release when using Exposure
Bracketing.
p.159
10. WB Adjustable
Range
Sets whether to automatically fine-tune
the white balance when specifying the
light source on the white balance
setting.
p.206
11. WB When Using
Flash
Sets the white balance setting when
using flash.
p.206
12. AWB in Tungsten
Light
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten light
color tone when the white balance is set
to F (Auto White Balance).
-
13. Color Temperature
Steps
Sets the adjustment steps for color
temperature.
p.210
14. Superimpose AF
Area
Sets whether to display the active AF
point(s) in red in the viewfinder.
p.128
92
Shooting Functions
4
A3
15. AF.S Setting
Sets the action priority for when the
focus mode is set to l and the
shutter release button is fully pressed.
p.123
16. AF.C Setting
Sets the action priority for Continuous
Shooting when the focus mode is set to
k.
p.123
17. AF Assist Light
Sets whether to use the AF assist light
when autofocusing in dark locations.
p.124
18. AF with Remote
Control
Sets whether to use autofocus when
shooting with remote control.
p.148
19. Remote Control in
Bulb
Sets the remote control operation when
using the remote control in p (Bulb)
mode.
p.116
20. Release While
Charging
Sets whether to release shutter while
the built-in flash is charging.
p.82
21. Flash in Wireless
Mode
Sets the built-in flash discharge method
in the wireless mode.
p.191
A4
22. LCD Panel
Illumination
Sets the illumination for the LCD panel. p.37
23. Saving Rotation
Info
Sets whether to save rotation
information when shooting.
p.249
24. Save Menu
Location
Sets whether to save the last menu tab
displayed on the monitor and to display
it again the next time the 3 button
is pressed.
p.294
25. Catch-in Focus
When set to [On], if the focus mode is
set to l and a manual focus lens is
attached, catch-in focus shooting is
enabled and the shutter is released
automatically when the subject comes
into focus.
p.134
26. AF Fine
Adjustment
Adjusts the AF focusing position. p.126
27. Using Aperture
Ring
Sets whether to enable shutter release
when the lens aperture ring is set to the
position other than s.
p.339
Reset Custom
Functions
Resets all the settings in the [A Custom
Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.
p.336
Menu
Item Function Page
93
Shooting Functions
4
Setting the Exposure
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by a combination of shutter
speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations of
shutter speed and aperture value for a particular subject. Different
combinations produce different effects.
By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressed
in the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating
different effects.
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.
Using slower shutter speed
If the subject is moving, the image will be
blurred because the shutter is open
longer.
It is possible to enhance the effect of
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by
intentionally using a slower shutter speed.
Using faster shutter speed
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow
freezing the action of a moving subject.
A faster shutter speed also helps to
prevent camera shake.
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area that
appears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed
Effect of Shutter Speed
Effect of Aperture
94
Shooting Functions
4
Opening the aperture (reduce the
aperture value)
Objects closer and farther than the
focused subject will be more out of focus.
For instance, if you take a picture of a
flower against a landscape with the
aperture open, the landscape in front and
behind the flower will be blurred,
emphasizing only the flower.
Closing the aperture (increase the
aperture value)
The range in focus expands forward and
backward. For instance, if you take a
picture of a flower against a landscape
with the aperture narrowed, the landscape
in front and behind the flower will be in
focus.
Aperture and Depth of Field
The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth of
field. The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used
and the distance to the subject.
• The depth of field for the X differs depending on the lens but
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a
scale for depth of field because of their designs).
Aperture
Open Close
(Smaller value) (Larger value)
Depth of field Shallow Deep
Area of focus
Narrow Wide
Lens focal length
Longer Shorter
(Telephoto) (Wide-angle)
Distance to the
subject
Near Far
95
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent
to ISO 100 to 12800. The default setting is [AUTO].
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) while
pressing the o button in
Capture mode.
The sensitivity displayed on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder changes.
Press the | button to set the sensitivity to
[AUTO].
2
Take your finger off the o button and rear e-dial (S ).
The sensitivity is set.
Setting the Sensitivity
AF.S
1/
ISO
AUTO
200
200
5.0
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
JPEG
ISO
AUTO
16M
P
11
11
96
Shooting Functions
4
Set the range in which the sensitivity is automatically adjusted when the
sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. The sensitivity is automatically corrected in the
range of [ISO 100-3200] by default.
1
Select [ISO AUTO Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [ISO AUTO Setting] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the minimum
sensitivity.
• The sensitivity can also be changed by pressing the o button once, taking
your finger off the button and turning the rear e-dial (S). In this case, the
sensitivity is fixed when the o button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.118) elapses.
•
When the exposure mode is set to
B
(Green),
L
(Shutter & Aperture Priority)
or
C
(Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO] and the setting cannot be changed.
•
When the exposure mode is set to
K
(Sensitivity Priority),
a
(Hyper-manual),
p
(Bulb) or
M
(Flash X-sync Speed), the sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO].
•
When the exposure mode is set to
p
(Bulb), the upper sensitivity limit is ISO 1600.
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 80 to 51200 when
[3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.91) is set to
[On]. However, the minimum sensitivity is ISO 160 when [Highlight
Correction] is set to [On] in [D-Range Setting] (p.214) of the [A Rec. Mode
3] menu.
• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can
reduce image noise by setting [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
(p.98)
•
You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in
accordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.120). This can be set in
[2. Sensitivity Steps]
of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu (
p.91
).
Setting the Range of Automatic Sensitivity Correction
ISO AUTO Setting
ISO
AUTO
100 3200-
AUTO ISO Parameters
MENU
97
Shooting Functions
4
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the maximum
sensitivity.
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AUTO ISO
Parameters] and press the four-way controller (5).
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the parameter and press
the 4 button.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
u
Slow
Increases the sensitivity
as little as possible
s
Standard (default setting)
a
Fast
Actively increases the
sensitivity
ISO AUTO Setting
AUTO ISO Parameters
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
ISO
AUTO
100 3200-
ISO AUTO Setting
AUTO ISO Parameters
MENU
ISO
AUTO
100 3200-
Expanding the Dynamic Range
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the
CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger it is, the
better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear in the picture.
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for
bright areas to occur in the image.
To expand the dynamic range, make the settings in [D-Range
Setting] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.214)
98
Shooting Functions
4
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or
unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.
- when shooting with a long exposure
- when shooting with a high sensitivity setting
- when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However, images
shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.
1
Select [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Auto], [Off],
[Low], [Medium], [High] or
[Custom].
3
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Auto], [Off], [Low], [Medium], or [High], proceed to Step 7.
Reducing Image Noise (Noise Reduction)
High-ISO NR
Auto
Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated
levels throughout ISO range. (default setting)
Off Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.
Low/Medium/High
Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level
throughout ISO range.
Custom
Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for
each ISO setting.
High-ISO NR
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Off
Low
Medium
Auto
Custom
High
ISO
NR
AUTO
ISO
NR
CUSTOM
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
99
Shooting Functions
4
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Setting] and
press the four-way controller (5).
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the sensitivity
appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (
23
)
to select a sensitivity value and use
the four-way controller (
45
) to set
the level of noise reduction which is
applied to the selected sensitivity.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[High-ISO NR 2] screen.
Press the | button to reset the setting of
the selected sensitivity value.
The sensitivity values displayed vary according to the [1. EV Steps] and [2.
Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.91).
6
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Reduces noise during long exposures.
1
Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Auto], [On] or [Off], and
press the 4 button.
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU
1 2
High-ISO NR
Reset
100
ISO
200
ISO
400
ISO
1600
ISO
3200
ISO
800
ISO
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
80
ISO
ISO
NR
OFF
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
12
3
4
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format PEF
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
OFF
NR
ON
NR
AUTO
100
Shooting Functions
4
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
This camera features the following nine exposure modes. Use the mode
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.45)
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
(z: Available ×: Not available)
Auto
Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and
internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise
Reduction as necessary. (default setting)
On
Applies Noise Reduction when the exposure time is longer than 1
second.
Off Does not apply Noise Reduction.
• Processing may take a while when shooting with Slow Shutter Speed NR set
to [On]. Pictures cannot be taken while an image is being processed.
• When the Noise Reduction function is activated, [nr] blinks on the LCD panel
and in the viewfinder where the aperture value is normally displayed, and a
countdown of processing time is displayed where the shutter speed is
normally displayed.
Changing the Exposure Mode
Exposure
Mode
Characteristics
EV
Compen-
sation
Change
Shutter
Speed
Change
Aperture
Value
Change
Sensi-
tivity
Page
B
Green
Lets you capture images
with fully automatic settings.
××××p.103
e
Hyper-
program
Automatically sets the
shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper
exposure according to
Program Line when taking
pictures. You can use the
front and rear e-dials to
switch between shutter
priority and aperture priority.
zzzzp.104
101
Shooting Functions
4
K
Sensitivity
Priority
Automatically sets the
shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper
exposure according to the
set sensitivity.
z ××
Other
than
AUTO
p.105
b
Shutter
Priority
Lets you set the desired
shutter speed for
expressing moving
subjects.
zz × z p.107
c
Aperture
Priority
Lets you set the desired
aperture value for
controlling the depth of
field.
z × zzp.109
L
Shutter
&
Aperture
Priority
Automatically sets the
sensitivity to obtain a
proper exposure with the
set shutter speed and
aperture value according
to the brightness of the
subject.
zzz
×
AUTO
only
p.110
a
Hyper-
manual
Lets you set the shutter
speed and aperture value
to capture the picture with
creative intent.
– zzzp.112
p
Bulb
Lets you capture images
that require slow shutter
speeds such as fireworks
and night scenes.
××z
Other
than
AUTO
(up to
ISO
1600)
p.115
M
Flash
X-sync
Speed
The shutter speed is
locked at 1/180 second.
Use this when using an
external flash that does
not automatically set the
sync speed.
–×z
Other
than
AUTO
p.116
For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front/rear e-
dial or the | button is operated. Set in [E-Dial Programming] of the [A Rec.
Mode 5] menu. (p.282) You can confirm the functions of the front and rear e-
dials and the | button by viewing the guides which appear on the monitor
when the camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned. (p.24)
Exposure
Mode
Characteristics
EV
Compen-
sation
Change
Shutter
Speed
Change
Aperture
Value
Change
Sensi-
tivity
Page
102
Shooting Functions
4
Program Line
In [Program Line] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu, you can choose from
the following Program Lines. When [eLINE] is selected for the |
button setting in e/K mode or L/a mode (p.282), exposure is
regulated according to the set Program Line.
Setting Characteristics
j Auto Camera determines the appropriate settings.
k Normal
Basic Program Automatic Exposure (default
setting)
l Hi-speed Priority
Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes high
shutter speeds.
m
DOF Priority
(deep)
Program Automatic Exposure that closes the
aperture as much as possible for a deep depth of
field.
n
DOF Priority
(shallow)
Program Automatic Exposure that opens the
aperture as much as possible for a shallow depth
of field.
o MTF Priority
Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes the
best aperture settings for the attached lens when
a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J or FA lens is used.
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring
When using a lens with an aperture
ring, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)
position while holding down the auto-
lock button on the lens.
103
Shooting Functions
4
Lets you capture images with fully automatic settings.
In B mode, pictures are taken with the following settings.
• Program Line j (AUTO)
• File Format JPEG
• Sensitivity AUTO
• Metering Method L (Multi-segment Metering)
•AF Point S (Auto)
• AUTO AF Point Setting 11 AF Points
• White Balance F (Auto)
• Custom Image Bright
• High-ISO NR Auto
• Slow Shutter Speed NR Auto
• Shake Reduction k (On)
• Color Space sRGB
1
Set the mode dial to B.
Using the B (Green) Mode
If the 3 button is pressed in 9 mode, the menu for Green Mode appears.
You cannot select items that cannot be changed.
104
Shooting Functions
4
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper
exposure according to Program Line when taking pictures.
You can also use the front and rear e-dials to change the shutter speed
and aperture value while maintaining the proper exposure. (p.282)
1
Set the mode dial to e.
•In B mode, the following functions are not available.
• Changing the shutter speed
• Changing the aperture value
• EV Compensation
• Flash (Flash On, Slow-speed
Sync, Exposure Compensation)
• Continuous Shooting
• Focus Mode k (l is
selected)
• D-Range Setting
• Lens Correction
• Exposure Bracketing
• Mirror Lock-up shooting
• Multi-exposure
• Interval Shooting
• Extended Bracketing
• Digital Filter
• HDR Capture
• Cross Processing
• Horizon Correction
• Saving as A mode
• L and |/Y button
operations
• Button Customization (default
settings are used)
• Custom menu settings (default
settings are used)
• The control panel cannot be displayed in B mode.
Using the e (Hyper-program) Mode
105
Shooting Functions
4
2
Confirm the shutter speed and aperture value.
Confirm the settings using the status screen, viewfinder or LCD panel.
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.
The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to
the selected sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to K.
• Set the Program Line to use in [Program Line] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
(p.102)
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.119)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
and aperture value when the sensitivity is not set to [AUTO] (p.95).
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
AF.S
1/
ISO
AUTO
125
100
5.6
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
JPEG
16M
[
37
]
P
11
11
106
Shooting Functions
4
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the sensitivity.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
• You can set the sensitivity to a value equivalent to ISO 100 to 12800. [AUTO]
is not available.
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.119)
•
The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.120)
AF.S
1/
ISO
30
100
4.5
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
JPEG
16M
[
37
]
Sv
11
11
107
Shooting Functions
4
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed
to have the subject show movement.
The aperture value is automatically set to give a proper exposure
depending on the shutter speed.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.93)
1
Set the mode dial to b.
2
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode
AF.S
1/
ISO
125
400
5.6
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
[
37
]
Tv
AUTO
JPEG
16M
11
11
108
Shooting Functions
4
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.119)
• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.120)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
when the sensitivity is not set to [AUTO] (
p.95
).
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the aperture value will blink on the
status screen and LCD panel and in
the viewfinder. If the subject is too bright, choose a faster shutter
speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When the
aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with
proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
109
Shooting Functions
4
Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field
is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when the
aperture is set to a large value, small lens opening. The depth of field is
shallower and the front and back of the focused object is blurred when the
aperture is set to a small value, large lens opening.
The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure depending
on the aperture value.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.93)
1
Set the mode dial to c.
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the aperture value.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode
AF.S
1/
ISO
30
400
4.5
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
[
37
]
Av
AUTO
JPEG
16M
11
11
110
Shooting Functions
4
You can set both the desired shutter speed and aperture to take the
picture.
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the manually set shutter speed
and aperture value will give the proper exposure according to the
brightness of the subject.
1
Set the mode dial to L.
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.119)
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.120)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value
when the sensitivity is not set to [AUTO] (
p.95
).
Using the L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) Mode
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the shutter speed will blink on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder. When the subject is too bright, set the aperture to a
smaller lens opening (larger number), and when too dark, set the
aperture to a larger lens opening (smaller number). Once blinking
stops, you can take a picture with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
111
Shooting Functions
4
2
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.
3
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the aperture value.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.119)
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1]
menu. (p.120)
•In L mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
AF.S
1/
ISO
1000
100
4.5
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
[
37
]
TAv
AUTO
JPEG
16M
11
11
112
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable
to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is
convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.93)
1
Set the mode dial to a.
2
Press the | button.
The shutter speed and aperture value are
automatically switched to obtain a proper
exposure.
Using the a (Hyper-manual) Mode
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the sensitivity will blink on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder. In such situations, change the shutter speed and
aperture. When the indication stops blinking, you can take a picture
with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
113
Shooting Functions
4
3
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.
4
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the aperture value.
The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder and on the LCD
panel.
While adjusting the shutter speed or
aperture value, the difference from the
proper exposure (EV value) is displayed
in a bar graph. The proper exposure is set
when V is in the middle of the EV bar. If it
is towards -, it is underexposed. If it is
towards +, it is overexposed. If the value
exceeds the range of the EV bar (±5.0), or
if the subject is too bright or too dark, the “+” or “-” blinks.
AF.S
1/
ISO
125
100
5.6
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
[
37
]
M
JPEG
16M
11
11
Difference from the
proper exposure
114
Shooting Functions
4
• The sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO] in a mode. When the sensitivity is
set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is changed to a mode, the sensitivity
is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of Automatic
Sensitivity Correction” (p.96).
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1]
menu. (p.120)
• Since the bar graphs in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel display the amount of
camera tilt to the left or right, the
difference from the proper exposure is
displayed as a number when [Electronic Level] is set to O (On).
Combining with L
When the exposure is locked (p.121) by pressing the L button in
a mode, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed, the
combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes while the
exposure value is retained.
Example:If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 and
these settings are locked with the L button, the
aperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed
is changed to 1/30 sec. with the front e-dial (R).
115
Shooting Functions
4
This setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which
require long exposures.
1
Set the mode dial to p.
2
Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
Using the p (Bulb) Mode
The following functions are not available in p mode.
- EV Compensation
- Exposure Bracketing
- Continuous Shooting
- Interval Shooting
- HDR Capture
AF.S
ISO
Bulb
100
5.6
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
JPEG
16M
[
37
]
B
11
11
116
Shooting Functions
4
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 second. Use this when using an
external flash that does not automatically set the sync speed.
1
Set the mode dial to M.
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.120)
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when the exposure
mode is set to p mode.
•
Use a sturdy tripod and the cable switch CS-205 (optional) or Remote Control
(optional) to prevent camera shake when using
p
mode. Connect the cable
switch to the cable release terminal (p.19).
• When using the remote control, set whether to start exposure with a press
and stop it with another press of the shutter release button on the remote
control, or to keep the shutter open as long as the release button on the
remote control is kept pressed. Set in [19. Remote Control in Bulb] of the
[A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.92).
• The sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO] in p mode. When the sensitivity is
set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is changed to p mode, the sensitivity
is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of Automatic
Sensitivity Correction” (p.96).
• When the exposure mode is set to p, the upper sensitivity limit is ISO 1600.
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we
recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when shooting
with a long exposure setting as the battery is being drained while the shutter
remains open. (p.53)
Using the M (Flash X-Sync Speed) Mode
AF.S
1/
ISO
180
100
5.6
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
[
37
]
X
JPEG
16M
11
11
117
Shooting Functions
4
Choose the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness and
determining exposure. The following three methods are available. The
factory default setting is L (Multi-segment metering).
1
Turn the metering mode
switching lever.
The set metering method is displayed in
the status screen and viewfinder.
L Multi-segmented Metering
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in 77
different zones. Even in backlit locations,
this mode automatically determines what
level of brightness is in which portion and
automatically adjusts exposure.
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) to adjust the aperture value.
• Press the | button to retain the shutter speed at 1/180 second and
automatically adjust the aperture value.
• The sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO] in M mode. When the sensitivity is
set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is changed to M mode, the sensitivity
is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of Automatic
Sensitivity Correction” (p.96).
Selecting the Metering Method
Center-weighted metering mode is automatically set even if you select multi-
segment metering mode when using a lens other than a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J,
FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s
(Auto). (Can only be used if [27. Using Aperture Ring] (p.339) in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu is set to [Permitted].)
118
Shooting Functions
4
MCenter-weighted Metering
Metering is weighted at the center of the
viewfinder. Use this metering when you want
to compensate for the exposure by
experience, instead of leaving it to the
camera. The illustration shows that
sensitivity increases as the pattern height
increases (center). This mode does not
automatically compensate for backlit scenes.
NSpot Metering
The brightness is measured only within a
limited area at the center of the viewfinder.
You can use this in combination with the AE
Lock (p.121) when the subject is extremely
small and the correct exposure is difficult to
obtain.
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment
Metering
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.91),
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during
multi-segment metering.
1
Off Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)
2
On Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.
Setting the Meter Operating Time
You can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),
[3 sec.] or [30 sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] of the [A Custom
Setting 1] menu (p.91).
119
Shooting Functions
4
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose
(darken) your picture.
The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]
of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. You can adjust the EV compensation
value from -5 to +5 (EV).
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) while
pressing the m button.
The exposure is adjusted.
m is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel
during adjustment.
Press the m button to check the compensation value after adjustment.
Press the | button to reset the EV compensation value to 0.0.
Adjusting Exposure
EV compensation is not available when the exposure mode is set to
B (Green) or p (Bulb) mode.
• The compensation value can also be changed by pressing the m button
once, taking your finger off the button and turning the rear e-dial (S). In
this case, EV compensation is set when the m button is pressed again or the
exposure metering timer (p.118) elapses.
• The compensation value is not canceled by turning the camera off or by
switching to another exposure mode.
Compensation value
AF.S
1/
ISO
100
100
5.6
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
JPEG ±0EV
16M
P
11
11
120
Shooting Functions
4
Set the exposure compensation steps to
increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in
[1. EV
Steps]
of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(
p.91
).
Changing the Exposure Steps
Step Interval Exposure Setting Value
1/3 EV
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7,
±4.0, ±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0
1/2 EV
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0
EV Compensation for a and M modes
For example, if the EV compensation value is set to +1.5 for a
(Hyper-manual) and M (Flash X-sync speed) modes, an
underexposure of 1.5 EV is displayed on the EV bar. If you set the
exposure value so that the V is displayed at the center of the EV bar,
the image will be captured with the compensated value.
1.
1
2
MENU
OK
OK
EV Steps
1/3 EV Steps
1/2 EV Steps
Exposure compensation steps
Cancel
now set to 1/3 EV
121
Shooting Functions
4
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use
this when the subject is too small or is backlit and a proper exposure
setting cannot be obtained.
1
Set the exposure and press the
L button.
The camera locks the exposure
(brightness) at that instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen and
viewfinder while the AE Lock is engaged.
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)
• The exposure remains locked as long as the L button is kept pressed or
the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure remains
locked for twice the amount of the exposure metering timer (p.118) even after
taking your finger off the L button.
• You will hear a beep when the L button is pressed. The beep can be
turned off. (p.288)
•
AE Lock is not available in
B
(Green),
p
(Bulb) or
M
(Flash X-sync Speed) mode.
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE Lock is canceled.
-the L button is pressed again
-the Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed
- the mode dial is turned
- the lens is changed
- a lens with an s (Auto) position is set to a position other than the s position
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on
the zooming position even while the AE Lock is engaged when using a zoom
lens whose maximum aperture value varies depending on the focal length.
However, the exposure value does not change and a picture is taken at a
brightness level set when the AE Lock is activated.
• The exposure can also be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L
with AF Locked] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.131)
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting
Auto Bracketing is a function for continuously shooting images with
the exposure automatically adjusted for underexposure and
overexposure. Each time the shutter release button is pressed, 2, 3
or 5 shots are taken. Refer to “Shooting while Adjusting the Settings
(Auto Bracketing)” (p.157).
122
4
Shooting Functions
Focusing
You can focus with the following methods.
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and
the focus is locked at that position, and k (Continuous mode) where
the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter
release button is pressed halfway. The factory default setting is l.
1
Turn the focus mode lever to l
or A.
=
Autofocus
The camera automatically focuses on the subject when the
shutter release button is pressed halfway.
\
Manual focus Manually adjust the focus.
Using the Autofocus
123
Shooting Functions
4
l
Single
mode
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the
subject comes into focus, the focus is locked (focus lock) at
that position. To focus on another subject, take your finger off
the shutter release button first, then press the shutter release
button halfway again.
• The AF assist light turns on as necessary. (p.124)
• Set the action priority for when the shutter release button is
pressed fully in [15. AF.S Setting] of the [A Custom Setting 3]
menu (p.92).
k
Continuous
mode
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the
shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator
] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. Even if the subject is not in focus, the shutter can be
released when the shutter release button is pressed fully.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus,
the camera automatically tracks the subject if it is determined
to be a moving object. The lens will automatically operate and
continuously focus on the subject.
• Set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [16. AF.C
Setting] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.92).
1
Focus-
priority
The shutter cannot be released until the
subject is in focus. (default setting)
If the subject is too close to the camera,
move back and take the picture. If the
subject is difficult to focus (p.75), adjust the
focus manually. (p.132)
2
Release-
priority
The shutter can be released even if the
subject is not in focus.
1
Focus-priority
Takes pictures giving priority to keeping
the subject in focus during Continuous
Shooting. (default setting)
2
FPS-priority
Takes pictures giving priority to the
shooting speed during Continuous
Shooting.
124
Shooting Functions
4
2
Look through the viewfinder and
press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
1Subjects that are difficult to focus on
(p.75)
You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the = button
is pressed.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Button]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF Button] screen appears.
Using the = Button to Focus on the Subject
Focus indicator
AF Assist Light
You can set whether or not to use the AF assist light during
l
mode
in [17. AF Assist Light] of the [
A
Custom Setting 3] menu (p.92).
1
On
To make focusing easier when the subject is in a dark location,
the AF assist light turns on when the shutter release button is
pressed halfway. (default setting)
2
Off The AF assist light will not be used.
125
Shooting Functions
4
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Enable AF].
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
6
Press the = button while
looking through the viewfinder.
Autofocus is performed.
7
Press the shutter release button.
When [Enable AF] is assigned to [Shutter Button Half Press] in [Button
Customization], press the shutter release button while holding down the
= button.
The picture is taken.
Enable AF
Autofocus is performed by using the = button or the
shutter release button. (default setting)
Cancel AF
\ appears in the viewfinder while the = button is
pressed. Autofocus is not performed when the shutter
release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the =
button to return to normal autofocus mode.)
l
Single mode
When the = button is pressed and the subject comes
into focus, the Focus Lock function is activated while
the button is pressed.
k
Continuous mode
The subject is kept in focus while the = button is
pressed.
AF Button
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
AF is performed when
the AF button is pressed
Enable AF
Cancel AF
126
Shooting Functions
4
You can adjust the AF focusing position.
1
Select [26. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting
4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [26. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or
[Apply One].
4
Press the four-way controller (5)
and adjust the value with the rear
e-dial (S) or the four-way
controller (45).
Available operations
AF Fine Adjustment
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture
images with the appropriate focus.
•
Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the
accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test shots.
Apply All Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.
Apply One
This item will appear on the display only when the lens ID is
obtained. Saves and applies a different adjustment value for
each lens type. (Up to 20 lens types)
Reset Resets the saved adjustment value.
Four-way controller (5)/
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)
Adjusts the focus to a closer position.
Four-way controller (4)/
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)
Adjusts the focus to a farther position.
| button Resets the adjustment value to ±0.
26.
AF Fine Adjustment
Apply All
Apply One Unset
Reset
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
±0
+5
127
Shooting Functions
4
5
Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.
6
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera returns to Capture mode.
7
Take a test picture.
You can easily check the focusing point by enlarging the image during
Digital Preview (p.138) or Live View (p.165).
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to. The factory default
setting is S (Auto).
Selected AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).
1
Turn the AF point switching dial.
Even when an adjustment value has been saved using [Apply One], if you
press the 4 button with [Apply All] selected in Step 3, the [Apply All] value is
used instead of the [Apply One] value.
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)
U
Center Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.
j
Select
Sets the focusing area to the user selected point from eleven
points in the AF frame.
S
Auto
The camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject
is not centered. You can select from 11 AF points (default
setting) or 5 points in [AUTO AF Point Setting] in the [A Rec.
Mode 1] menu.
128
Shooting Functions
4
1
Set the AF point switching dial to
j.
V appears in the viewfinder and the AF
point can be changed.
2
Look through the viewfinder and check the position of the
subject.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to change the AF
point.
The selected AF point appears in the
status screen.
• AF point(s) are not illuminated red in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for
[14. Superimpose AF Area] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.91).
• The focusing area is fixed to U regardless of this setting when using lenses
other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens. (p.337)
Setting the Focus Position in the Viewfinder
P
AF.S
1/
ISO
AUTO
2000 2.8
±0.0
±0±0
F
11223344+5
-
5
AWB
16M
[
37
]
1600
JPEG
129
Shooting Functions
4
Available operations
The AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder
(Superimpose AF Area) and you can
check where you set the AF point.
4 button Returns the AF point to the center of the AF
frame.
Press and hold 4 button Disables changing the AF point and enables
direct key operation of the four-way controller
(2345). To enable changing the AF point,
press the 4 button while direct key
operation is enabled. You will hear a beep
when switching between enabled and
disabled.
• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned
off or the focusing area is switched to U or S .
• V appears in the viewfinder when the AF point can be changed.
• When any of the following operations are performed, changing of the AF
point (in Step 3) is canceled.
- the main switch is turned off
- the mode dial is turned
- the AF point switching dial is turned
-the Q button, 3 button, M button or U button is pressed
130
Shooting Functions
4
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot
automatically focus on the subject. In this case, focus the camera on the
subject in the focusing area, lock the focus at that position (Focus Lock),
and then recompose your picture.
1
Set the focus mode lever to l.
2
Frame the desired composition
for your picture in the viewfinder.
3
Center the subject to focus in the
viewfinder and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
4
Lock the focus.
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain
locked.
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock)
Example)
The person is out of
focus and the background
is focused instead.
131
Shooting Functions
4
5
Recompose the picture while
keeping the shutter release
button pressed halfway.
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be out
of focus.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.288)
Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked
Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the
[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.91) to
lock the exposure value while the focus
is locked.
1
Off Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)
2
On Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.
5.
1
2
MENU
OK
AE-L with AF Locked
Off
On
AE is locked
Cancel
when the focus
is locked
OK
132
Shooting Functions
4
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in
focus even during manual focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].
1
Set the focus mode lever to \.
2
Look through the viewfinder,
press the shutter release button
halfway and turn the focusing
ring.
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
Using the Focus Indicator
133
Shooting Functions
4
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.
1
Set the focus mode lever to
\
.
2
Look through the viewfinder and
turn the focusing ring until the
subject is clearly visible in the
viewfinder.
• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the
subject is difficult to focus (p.75) and the focus indicator will not appear.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.288)
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field
Focus indicator
134
Shooting Functions
4
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode
When [25. Catch-in Focus] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.92)
is set to [On], if the focus mode is set to l and one of the following
types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is enabled and
the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into
focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has a = and \ setting on the lens (the
setting on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)
How to Take Pictures
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.
2 Set the focus mode lever to l.
3 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
4 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes
into focus at the set position.
135
Shooting Functions
4
Checking the Composition, Exposure
and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,
exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
Choose whether to use Optical Preview or Digital Preview when the main
switch is turned to the preview position (|).
The default setting is Optical Preview.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Preview Dial]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Preview Dial] screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Optical Preview]
or [Digital Preview].
Preview Method Description
|
Optical Preview For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.
e
Digital Preview
For checking the composition, exposure and
focus on the monitor.
You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on the
monitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check the
settings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.165 for details.
Selecting the Preview Method
Preview Dial
For checking depth of
field with viewfinder
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
136
Shooting Functions
4
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
For Digital Preview, you can set whether to display the histogram and
Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to enable enlarging images.
1
Select [Digital Preview] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Digital Preview] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge
Instant Review].
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
• While shooting with Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or Live View, Optical
Preview is used regardless of the setting.
• Digital Preview can also be assigned to the |/Y button. If Optical
Preview is assigned to the Preview dial and Digital Preview is assigned to the
|/Y button, you can use both preview functions easily. Refer to p.285
for assigning a function to the | /Y button.
Setting the Display for Digital Preview
Digital Preview
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
MENU
137
Shooting Functions
4
1
Position the subject inside the AF
frame and press the shutter
release button halfway to focus
on the subject.
2
Turn the main switch to | while
looking through the viewfinder.
You can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder while the main switch is set to
the position
|.
During this time, no shooting information
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the
shutter cannot be released.
3
Take your finger off the main switch.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.
Displaying the Optical Preview
138
Shooting Functions
4
1
Focus on the subject, then
compose the picture in the
viewfinder and turn the main
switch to |.
When Digital Preview is assigned to the
|/Y button, press the |/Y
button.
The icon (|) appears on the monitor
during preview and you can check the
composition, exposure and focus.
Available operations
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
Displaying the Digital Preview
Rear e-dial (S) Enlarges the preview image. (p.237)
L button Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]
and press the 4 button.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.
AE.L
139
Shooting Functions
4
Using the Shake Reduction Function
to Prevent Camera Shake
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures in
situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower
shutter speed without a risk of the camera shake.
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following
situations.
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,
on cloudy days and in the shade
• When taking telephoto pictures
The Shake Reduction function can be used to reduce horizontal and
vertical camera shake or keep the image level.
Using the Shake Reduction Function
• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by
subject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter
speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake
Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In
this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake Reduction function and use
the camera with a tripod.
Blurred picture
Picture taken with the Shake
Reduction function
140
Shooting Functions
4
1
Select [Shake Reduction] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select k or l and press
the 4 button.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
4
Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter
release button halfway.
k appears in the viewfinder and the
Shake Reduction function is activated.
When an image is tilted, it can be corrected up to a maximum of ±2
degrees.
1
Select [Horizon Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake
k
Uses Shake Reduction. (default
setting)
l Does not use Shake Reduction.
Correcting the Tilt of the Images
Movie
Live View
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1234 5
Movie
Live View
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length 35mm
Exit
MENU
1234 5
141
Shooting Functions
4
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
4
Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The following indicators appear on the status screen.
q Shake Reduction On + Horizon Correction On
r Shake Reduction Off + Horizon Correction On
• Set [Shake Reduction] to l (Off) when using the camera with a tripod or
when this function is not needed.
• The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following
situations. Note that the Shake Reduction function cannot be selected when
the following functions are set.
- p (Bulb) mode
- Self-timer shooting
- Remote Control shooting
- Mirror Lock-up shooting
- when [Auto Align] is set to P (Off) in the [HDR Capture] setting
- when using the flash in wireless mode
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right
after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the
Shake Reduction function to become stable, and then press the shutter
button gently. If k appears in the viewfinder when you press the shutter
release button halfway, the camera is ready to take a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any X compatible
PENTAX lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to a position other than
the s (Auto) position for a lens with a s position or a lens without an s
position is used, the camera will not operate unless [27. Using Aperture Ring]
is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu. Set this beforehand.
In such cases, however, some functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on
[27. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.339) for details.
142
Shooting Functions
4
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information
such as focal length.
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens information
is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
If you use a lens whose information such as focal length cannot be
automatically obtained (p.337), the [Input Focal Length] setting screen
appears when the camera is turned on with the Shake Reduction function
set to k (On).
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.
1
Use the four-way controller
(45) or the rear e-dial (S) to
set the focal length.
Select from the following 34 focal length
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)
2
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens
whose information such as focal length can be automatically obtained.
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture
set to a position other than s, set [27. Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. (p.339)
• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well
as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.
8 101215182024283035
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting
being used in the same manner.
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Input Focal Length
135
120
100
143
Shooting Functions
4
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
4
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or Z.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.90).
Shooting with Self-timer
g
Self-timer
(12 sec.)
Shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode
to include the photographer in the picture.
Z
Self-timer
(2 sec.)
A mirror pops up immediately after the shutter release
button is pressed. The shutter is released after about 2
seconds. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when the
shutter release button is pressed.
MENU
2s
2s
MUP
OK
OK
Drive Mode
Self-timer (12 sec.)
Cancel
144
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
7
Press the shutter release button
fully.
For g, the front and back self-timer lamps
start blinking slowly and blink rapidly 2
seconds before the shutter is released.
The beep is heard and the rate increases.
The shutter will be released about 12
seconds after the shutter release button
is pressed fully.
For Z, the shutter will be released about
2 seconds after the shutter release button
is pressed fully.
145
Shooting Functions
4
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote
control unit (p.349).
You can select from the following three settings for Remote Control
shooting.
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
Self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if
[Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.312) of the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.288)
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
function (p.121) or attach the provided ME viewfinder cap. The light entering
the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure mode is set
to a (Manual).
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional)
h
Remote Control
The shutter is released immediately after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
i
Remote Control
(3s delay)
The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
i
Remote
Continuous
Shooting
Continuous shooting starts when the shutter release
button on the remote control unit is pressed. Press the
shutter release button on the remote control unit again to
exit continuous shooting.
Removing the Eyecup FR Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap
146
Shooting Functions
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.
4
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select h, i, or i.
W appears on the LCD panel. The self-
timer lamp will blink and the camera is in
a stand-by status.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
Drive Mode
Remote Control
Cancel
MENU
MUP
OK
OK
147
Shooting Functions
4
7
Point the remote control unit
towards the remote control
receiver on the front or back of
the camera and press the shutter
release button on the remote
control.
The operating distance of the remote
control unit is approximately 4 m from the
front of the camera and approximately 2
m from the back of the camera.
After a picture is taken, the self-timer
lamp lights for 2 seconds and then returns
to blinking.
Approx.
4 m
Approx.
2 m
148
Shooting Functions
4
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.
When [18. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 3]
menu (p.92), you can use the remote control unit to adjust the focus. (AF
cannot be used with the remote control unit during Live View.)
• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, AF can be operated with
the S button. The { button cannot be used.
• Select a mode other than h, i or i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel
the Remote Control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is
turned off if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.312) of the [A Rec.
Mode 5] menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when h, i or i
is set.
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
function (p.121) or attach the provided ME viewfinder cap. The light entering
the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure mode is set
to a (Manual).
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a
fee).
Removing the Eyecup FR Attaching the
ME Viewfinder cap
149
Shooting Functions
4
Use the Mirror Lock-up function if camera shake is evident even when the
remote control or cable switch is used with a tripod.
For Mirror Lock-up Shooting, press the shutter release button to raise the
mirror up and press it again to release the shutter.
The following two types of Mirror Lock-up shooting are available.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select d.
4
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select d or e.
d appears in the status screen and on
the LCD panel.
Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function
d
Mirror Up Mirror Lock-up shooting with the shutter release button.
e
Mirror Up
Remote Control
Mirror Lock-up shooting with the remote control. The
shutter will be released immediately after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed
(p.145).
Drive Mode
Mirror Lock-up Shooting
Cancel
MENU
MUP
MUP
OK
OK
150
Shooting Functions
4
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
The mirror pops up and you will hear a beep. The AE Lock function is
enabled with the exposure value set immediately before the mirror pops
up.
8
Press the shutter release button fully again.
The shutter is released and the picture is taken.
• Select a mode other than d or e in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel
Mirror Lock-up shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned
off if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.312) of the [A Rec. Mode
5] menu.
• The mirror automatically returns to its original position if 1 minute elapses
after the mirror pops up when the shutter release button is pressed for the
first time (except while using Multi-exposure).
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when d or e
is set.
• The beep that sounds when the mirror pops up can be turned off. (p.288)
151
Shooting Functions
4
Taking Pictures Continuously
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
The following two types of Continuous Shooting are available.
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
3
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or h.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Continuous Shooting
g
Continuous
Shooting (Hi)
For JPEG image with p/C, up to approx. 30 frames
are taken continuously at a maximum of approx. 7.0 fps.
h
Continuous
Shooting (Lo)
For JPEG image with p/C, pictures are taken
continuously at a maximum of approx. 1.6 fps until the SD
Memory Card is full.
When the file format is [RAW] (PEF), up to approx. 20 frames for g and up to
approx. 40 frames for h can be taken continuously.
Drive Mode
Continuous Shooting (Hi)
Cancel
MENU
MUP
OK
OK
152
Shooting Functions
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.
During Interval Shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set
time.
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.
• If the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in
the first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• Focusing is continuously activated during Continuous Shooting when the focus
mode is set to k (Continuous mode).
• You can also use the remote control for Continuous Shooting. (p.145)
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the
built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the
built-in flash is ready in [20. Release While Charging] of the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu. (p.82)
• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
Continuous Shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off
if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.312) of the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu.
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Lens Correction] (p.218) is set to
On.
Interval Shooting
• Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.
- when the exposure mode is set to A, B (Green), p (Bulb), or C
(Movie)
- when Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set
• When Interval Shooting is set, Multi-exposure is not available.
153
Shooting Functions
4
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Interval].
When taking two or more pictures, set the
wait time until the next picture is taken.
Use the four-way controller (45) to
select the number of hours, minutes, and
seconds, and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the time.
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes, and 00 seconds.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].
Set the number of shots to be taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of shots to be taken.
You can select between 1 and 999 shots.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval].
Set the time when the first picture is taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Now] or [Set Time].
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.
Now
Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more
pictures.
Set Time
Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller
(3) to select [Start Time], use the four-way controller (45) to
select the time, and use the four-way controller (23) to set
the start time.
Interval Shooting
MENU
Start Shooting
Interval
Number of Shots
Start Interval
002images
Now
Start Time
Cancel OK
OK
00 00 00
:
'"
154
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears when
focused.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in
Step 2.
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal
Capture mode.
• The camera cannot be operated during Interval Shooting. To cancel the
Interval Shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the
shutter release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation
screen, and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press
the 4 button. You can also exit the Interval Shooting by turning the main
switch off or turning the mode dial.
• [Single Frame Shooting] is selected regardless of the current drive mode
setting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l (Single mode)
or if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing
cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review,
they cannot be enlarged or deleted.
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].
• Interval Shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more
available space.
• If the Auto Power Off function (p.304) turns the camera off during Interval
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time
approaches.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using
the Interval Shooting over a long period of time. (p.53)
button to start interval
shooting
Press the shutter release
155
Shooting Functions
4
You can create a composite picture by taking multiple frames.
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select the number of
shots.
Select from 2 to 9 shots.
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV
Adjustment] and use the four-way controller (45) to
select O or P.
When set to O (On), the exposure is adjusted automatically according to
the number of shots.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Multi-exposure
• Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.
- when the exposure mode is set to B (Green) or C (Movie)
- when Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set
• When Multi-exposure is set, the following functions are not available.
- Exposure Bracketing, Extended Bracketing or Interval Shooting (The
function selected last is used)
- Lens Correction
Multi-exposure
Cancel
MENU
Start Shooting
Number of Shots
Auto EV Adjustment
OK
OK
2times
156
Shooting Functions
4
7
Take a picture.
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the
shutter release button is pressed. Press the i button during Instant
Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures again
from the first frame.
The pictures are saved when the set number of shots is taken, and then
the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures
that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is ended.
- when the Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (2345), M
button or |/Y button is pressed
- when the mode dial is turned
- when Exposure Bracketing is set
• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed. (It is not displayed when
the camera is connected to an AV device.)
157
Shooting Functions
4
Shooting while Adjusting the
Settings (Auto Bracketing)
Auto Bracketing is a function for shooting while automatically changing the
camera settings. There are two Auto Bracketing modes: Exposure
Bracketing and Extended Bracketing.
You can set Auto Bracketing Order in [8. Auto Bracketing Order] in the
[A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.91).
You can take continuous pictures with different exposures when the
shutter release button is pressed. You can select to take 2 images
(Standard/+), 2 images (Standard/-), 3 images or 5 images. When taking
3 pictures, the first image is exposed with no compensation, the second
image is underexposed (negative compensation) and the third image is
overexposed (positive compensation).
10 - +
Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)
2 - 0 +
Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed
3+ 0 -
Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed
40 + -
Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically
Changed (Exposure Bracketing)
Standard exposure Underexposure Overexposure
• Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.
- when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb)
- when HDR Capture is set
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.
The function selected last is used.
158
Shooting Functions
4
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select l.
3
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select l, b, or c.
4
Turn the front e-dial (R) to set the number of shots.
Select [2 images (+)], [2 images (-)], [3 images] or [5 images].
5
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to set the bracketing amount.
The following values can be set according to the step interval set in [1.
EV Steps] (p.120) in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
l
Exposure
Bracketing
Takes pictures with the shutter release button.
b
Exposure
Bracketing +
Self-timer
Takes pictures with the self-timer. Self-timer
operates according to the self-timer (p.143)
setting.
c
Exposure
Bracketing +
Remote Control
Takes pictures with the remote control. Remote
control operates according to the remote control
(p.145) setting. When set to i (Remote
Continuous Shooting), the shutter is released
immediately.
Step Interval Bracketing Amount
1/3 EV
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0
1/2 EV
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0
Drive Mode
Exposure Bracketing
Cancel
3image(s)
MENU
11223344+5
-
5
±0.5EV
MUP
OK
OK
159
Shooting Functions
4
Available operations
6
Press the 4 button.
The value for the first image blinks on the monitor.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.
When the subject is in focus, the focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder and the EV compensation value appears on the status screen
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.
8
Press the shutter release button fully.
Continue to press the shutter release button until the set number of shots
has been captured.
Consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in [8. Auto
Bracketing Order] of the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.91).
m button +
Rear e-dial (
S
)
Adjusts the EV compensation when taking only
underexposed or overexposed images with Exposure
Bracketing. Images are taken with an EV compensation
value set to 0 (intermediate value). (Up to ±8 EV)
| button Resets the compensation value to ±0.
• When the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is
locked in the first image and is used for subsequent images.
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of
the exposure metering timer (default setting is about 20 seconds) (p.118) and
you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this case,
autofocus works for each image. After about twice the amount of the
exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for taking
the first image.
• When [9. One-Push Bracketing] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.91) is
set to [On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed
fully, all images are automatically shot with one press of the shutter release
button.
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or external flash
(P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously. However,
when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take
consecutive images may cause the second and third images to be taken
before the flash is fully charged. Take each image after confirming that
charging is complete.
• If you use Exposure Bracketing frequently, you can assign it to the |/Y
button. (p.279)
160
Shooting Functions
4
You can save pictures with three different levels of White Balance,
Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness.
Unlike Exposure Bracketing, three pictures are saved each time the
shutter is released.
1
Select [Extended Bracketing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Extended Bracketing] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item and press the
4 button.
Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings
(Extended Bracketing)
• When Extended Bracketing is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and
cannot be changed. You cannot use Extended Bracketing when the file
format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+].
• When Extended Bracketing is set, the following functions are not available.
• Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure
• Cross Processing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture (The function selected last
is used)
Extended Bracketing
Off
Bracketing Amount
MENU
OFF
OFF
Extended Bracketing
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
White Balance
Saturation
Hue
High/Low Key Adj
Sharpness
Contrast
WB
OFF
OFF
Off
S
161
Shooting Functions
4
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Bracketing
Amount] and press the four-way controller (5).
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the bracketing amount
and press the 4 button.
Select [±1] (default setting), [±2], [±3] or
[±4].
For [White Balance], select from [BA±1]
(default setting), [BA±2], [BA±3], [GM±1],
[GM±2] or [GM±3].
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to Capture mode.
7
Take a picture.
Three images are saved.
• Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing can be used at the same
time. When used at the same time, each time the shutter is released for
Exposure Bracketing, three images with Extended Bracketing applied are
saved.
• Parameters that cannot be set due to the image finishing tone setting of
Custom Image also cannot be set for Extended Bracketing. (Example: When
set to [Monochrome], Saturation and Hue cannot be selected for Extended
Bracketing) (p.222)
• When [Fine Sharpness] or [Extra Sharpness] is set for Custom Image, the
sharpness of Extended Bracketing operates as Fine Sharpness or Extra
Sharpness.
• When [Contrast] is set for Custom Image, the contrast of Extended
Bracketing operates according to the [Contrast] setting.
Extended Bracketing
Saturation
Bracketing Amount
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
±1
±2
±3
±4
162
4
Shooting Functions
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters
You can apply a filter when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter Name Effect Parameter
Toy Camera
For taking pictures that
look as if taken with a toy
camera.
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Blur: +1 to +3
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Retro
For taking pictures with
the look of old photos.
Toning: -3 to +3
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
High Contrast
For taking pictures with
high contrasts.
+1 to +5
Extract Color
For extracting two
specific colors and
making the rest of the
image black and white.
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1:
-2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2:
-2 to +2
Soft
*1
For taking pictures with a
soft focus throughout the
image.
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Starburst
*1
For taking pictures of
night scenes or lights
reflected on water with a
special sparkling look by
adding extra glitter to the
highlights.
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/
Heart/Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
Fish-eye
*1
For taking pictures that
look as if taken with a
fish-eye lens.
Weak/Medium/Strong
163
Shooting Functions
4
*1 Not available when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).
*2 Available only when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).
1
Select [Digital Filter] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The screen for selecting a filter appears.
Custom Filter
*1
Customize and save a
filter to your own
preferences.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
Color
*2
For taking pictures with
the selected color filter.
Select from 18 filters (6
colors × 3 tones).
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
• When Digital Filter is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot
be changed. You cannot use Digital Filter when the file format is set to [RAW]
or [RAW+].
• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available.
- Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure, Continuous Shooting
- Extended Bracketing or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.
Filter Name Effect Parameter
164
Shooting Functions
4
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a filter.
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the parameter and
the four-way controller (45) to
adjust the parameter’s value.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Main switch (|) Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the filter effect applied. (Not available
when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).)
L button Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), change the settings from
[Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.171)
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 2 to finish shooting with digital filter.
• You can also apply digital filter after shooting them to JPEG/RAW images in
Playback mode. (p.265)
Starburst
Cancel Check OK
OK
MENU
AE.L
OFF
OFF
Shape
Cancel Check OK
OK
MENU
AE.L
165
Shooting Functions
4
Shooting with Live View
You can shoot a picture while displaying the real-time image on the
monitor.
• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness
of the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image
may flicker.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become
stable before shooting.
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When Live View is ended
after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be restarted by pressing the U
button.
• If you continue shooting with Live View for a prolonged period, the internal
temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It
is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To prevent
the image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool
down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature
warning) will appear on the monitor and Live View may not be available.
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in
direct sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.
• If Live View is used even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View
may end before 5 minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is available
even if Live View is ended.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in
the Live View image and/or captured image.
• During Live View, nothing is displayed in the viewfinder.
• Holding the camera by hand and shooting while viewing the monitor may
cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• The field of view of the image display is nearly 100%.
• You can use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) or a commercially available
HDMI cable to display Live View images on a TV or monitor. (p.256)
• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.
166
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the display and autofocus mode for Live View.
1
Select [Live View] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Live View] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select an autofocus
method.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Show Grid]
and press the four-way controller (5).
Setting Live View
I
Face Detection
AF
Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and performs
contrast autofocus. A yellow frame appears for a main
face (white frames appear for other faces), and
autofocus and automatic exposure are performed for
the main face. (default setting)
The face detection is not performed when the focus
mode is set to \.
i
Contrast AF
Displays Live View and performs autofocus based on
the information obtained from the image sensor.
S
Phase Difference
AF
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the AF
sensor.
If the shutter release button is pressed halfway during
Live View, the Live View image will disappear and the
autofocus system operates. Once focused, the Live
View image will be displayed again.
MENU
Live View
Info Overlay
Show Grid
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Autofocus Method
Cancel OK
OK
167
Shooting Functions
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a grid display type and
press the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), e
(4x4 Grid), f (Golden Section) or g
(Scale).
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Info Overlay],
[Histogram] or [Bright/Dark Area].
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
It takes more time to focus on the subject when using I or i than when
using S. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects (or
under the following conditions).
- objects with poor contrast
- objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes
- objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a
water fountain
- objects whose distance from the camera changes
- small objects
- objects appearing in both the foreground and background
- when using a special filter
- objects at the edge of the screen
Live View
MENU
Info Overlay
Show Grid
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Autofocus Method
Cancel OK
OK
OFF
OFF
168
Shooting Functions
4
1
Select an exposure mode.
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.
2
Press the U button.
The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the U button again to exit Live View.
Taking a Still Picture
1 Exposure Mode 8 Battery level
2 Flash Mode 9 Adjusting composition
3 Drive Mode 10 Temperature warning
4 White Balance 11 Electronic Level
5 Custom Image 12 Contrast AF frame
6 Extended Bracketing/Multi-
exposure/Interval Shooting/
Digital Filter/HDR Capture
13
Phase Difference AF frame/AF point
14 EV Compensation
15 Histogram
7 Number of shots using Multi-
exposure/Cross Processing
16 AE Lock
17 Shutter speed
[
1234
]
+1.0
+1.0
2000 F2.8 3200
P
P
USER
USER
SHIFT
SHIFT
11223344+5
-
5
ISO
[
37
]
2000 F2.8 400
P
P
ISO
12345678
14
15
12
19181716 20 21 22 23
11
9
10
13
Live View display
(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)
169
Shooting Functions
4
* Indicator 9 is displayed when switching to Live View after adjusting the
composition in [Composition Adjust.] (p.220) in the [
A
Rec. Mode 2] menu.
* Indicator 11 is displayed when [Electronic Level] is set to O (On) (p.299).
When the Electronic Level function is assigned to the |/Y button
(p.285), press the |/Y button to switch the display on/off.
* Indicator 13 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during Live
View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame is displayed
instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not displayed
when the focus mode is set to \.
* When 17, 18, and 20 can be changed, 5 appears next to the set value.
* Indicators 22 and 23 are displayed when [Autofocus Method] is set to I
and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition
frames are displayed on the monitor.) When the subject is in focus, a
green frame is displayed. It turns red when the subject is not in focus.
Available operations
*1 Available only when [Autofocus Method] is I or i, and the focus mode is l
or the AF point switching dial is set to j (Select).
3
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
18 Aperture value 22 Main face detection frame
(Face Detection AF)
19 EV bar
20 Sensitivity 23 Face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
21
Remaining image storage capacity
M button Enlarges the image.
2, 4, or 6 times original size (when the focus mode is
=)
2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times original size (when the focus
mode is \)
| button Returns the position of the display area to the center
(during enlarged view).
Press and hold 4
button *1
Switches the function of the four-way controller
(2345) to Change AF point or direct key operation.
4 button *1 Returns the position of the AF point to the center
(when Change AF point is enabled).
Four-way controller
(2345)
Changes the AF point (when Change AF point is
enabled).
Moves the display area (during enlarged view).
170
Shooting Functions
4
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• When the focus mode is set to k and [Autofocus Method] is set to i,
the camera focuses on the center of the screen when autofocus starts and
then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus. When [Autofocus
Method] is set to I, the camera automatically tracks the detected face.
• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.
• You can check the depth of field on the monitor by turning the main switch to
| during Live View.
The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To
change the settings, press the 3 button and change them from each
menu.
171
Shooting Functions
4
Recording Movies
You can record movies using Live View.
You can record movies with monaural audio in AVI file format.
1
Select [Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select the number of
recorded pixels, and press the
4 button.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level]
and press the four-way controller (5).
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the quality
level and press the 4 button.
Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of
recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.
Changing the Movie Settings
Recorded Pixels Pixels Aspect Ratio Frame Rate
a 1920×1080 16:9 25 fps
b
(default setting)
1280×720 16:9 30 fps
b 1280×720 16:9 25 fps
c 640×480 4:3 30 fps
c 640×480 4:3 25 fps
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Movie Aperture Control
Shake Reduction
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
00:31'55"1280x720
Fixed
FullHD
25
HD
30
HD
25
VGA
30
VGA
25
172
Shooting Functions
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound] and
press the four-way controller (5).
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select g or Z and
press the 4 button.
7
Set Cross Processing and Digital Filter as necessary.
Refer to p.225 for details on Cross Processing and p.162 for Digital Filter.
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie
Aperture Control] and press the four-way controller (5).
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the [Fixed] or
[Auto] and press the 4 button.
10
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the 5 button.
11
Use the four-way controller (23) to select k or l
and press the 4 button.
12
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
g
Records sound. (default setting)
Z
Does not record sound.
Fixed
The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie
recording starts. (default setting)
Auto The aperture is controlled automatically.
k
Uses Shake Reduction.
l
Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)
173
Shooting Functions
4
You can connect a commercially available stereo microphone to the
microphone terminal on the camera and record stereo sound. Using an
external microphone can also help to reduce the possibility of recording
camera operation sounds.
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Open the microphone
terminal cover and
connect the plug of the
microphone to the
microphone terminal
on the camera.
3
Turn the camera on.
Connecting a Microphone
The following specifications are recommended for external microphones.
• Plug: Stereo mini plug (ø3.5 mm)
• Format: Stereo electret condenser
• Power: Plug-in Power Method (operating voltage of 2.0 V or lower)
• Impedance: 2.2 kΩ
If the external microphone is disconnected during recording, the camera
cannot switch to the internal microphone until recording has stopped. No sound
will be recorded.
If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the sound
can be played back in stereo when you use a commercially available HDMI
cable to output the movie to an HDMI-compatible AV device. (p.258) If you use
an AV cable to output the movie, monaural sound is played back.
174
Shooting Functions
4
1
Set the mode dial to C.
Live View for movie recording is
displayed.
Available operations
Recording Movies
Rear e-dial (S) Changes the aperture value when [Movie Aperture
Control] is set to [Fixed]. (default setting)
| button Sets the aperture value to obtain a proper exposure.
(default setting)
Returns the position of the display area to the center
(during enlarged view).
m button +
Rear e-dial (S)
Performs EV compensation (up to ±2 EV).
M button Enlarges the image.
2, 4, or 6 times original size (when the focus mode is
=)
2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times original size (when the focus
mode is \)
Press and hold 4
button *1
Switches the function of the four-way controller
(2345) to Change AF point or direct key operation.
4 button *1 Returns the position of the AF point to the center
(when Change AF point is enabled).
00
:
30'00"F2.8
1+2-2 1
+1.5
+1.5
HD
HD
Shake Reduction
Recordable Time
Sound
175
Shooting Functions
4
*1 Available only when [Autofocus Method] is I or i, and the focus mode is l
or the AF point switching dial is set to j (Select).
2
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording of the movie starts.
4
Press the shutter release button again.
Recording stops.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Changes the AF point (when Change AF point is
enabled).
Moves the display area (during enlarged view).
• When [Sound] is set to g (On), the camera operation sounds are also
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do
not operate the camera while recording.
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.
• The flash is not available.
• When recording movies using image processing, such as Digital Filter, some
frames may be dropped from the recorded movie.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie
recording, the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.
176
Shooting Functions
4
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• Live View images in C mode are displayed according to the [Live View]
settings (p.166) made in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. However, the Bright/
Dark Area warning is not displayed during movie recording.
• You can set the functions for when the front/rear e-dial or the | button is
operated. (p.282)
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter
kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.53)
• You can also use the optional remote control to record a movie. (p.145)
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect
the camera to an AV device with the mini HDMI terminal (p.258). You cannot
output a movie using the PC/AV terminal while recording.
177
Shooting Functions
4
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same
manner as saved images.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to
play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
3
Press the four-way controller
(2).
Movie playback starts.
Available operations
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.
Playing Back Movies
Four-way controller (2) Pauses/Resumes playback.
Rear e-dial (S) Volume control (6 levels)
Four-way controller (5) Forwards a frame (during pause).
Press and hold four-way
controller (5)
Fast-forwards playback while pressed.
Four-way controller (4) Reverses playback./
Reverses a frame (during pause).
Press and hold four-way
controller (4)
Fast-reverses playback while pressed.
Four-way controller (3) Stops playback./
Displays the playback mode palette (when
stopped). (p.234)
L button Saves the displayed image in JPEG format
(during pause).
Movie 10
min
00
sec
100-0001
100-0001
178
Shooting Functions
4
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still
picture.
1
Press the four-way controller (2)
in Step 3 on p.177 to pause the
movie, and display the frame to
save as a still picture.
While paused, you can advance the
movie in one-frame increments using the
four-way controller (45).
The frame number and total number of
frames appear at the top right of the
screen.
2
Press the L button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The captured image is saved as a new
image.
• You can use the provided AV cable I-AVC7 or a commercially available HDMI
cable to play back the recorded movies on a TV screen or other AV devices.
(p.256)
• Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,
monaural sound is played back when you output the movie via the PC/AV
terminal. When you output the movie via the mini HDMI terminal, sound is
played back in stereo.
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
Movie 10
min
00
sec
90/1800
90/1800
AE-L
Frame number/Total number
of frames
Cancel
Save as
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
OK
OK
179
Shooting Functions
4
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to
play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [ (Movie
Editing) and press the 4 button.
The movie editing screen appears.
5
Select point(s) where you want to
divide the movie.
Up to four points can be selected.
Available operations
Editing Movies
Four-way controller (2) Plays back/Pauses a movie.
Four-way controller (5) Moves forward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the next dividing point (during
playback).
Four-way controller (4) Moves backward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the previous dividing point (during
playback).
Rear e-dial (S) Volume control (6 levels)
| button Confirms/cancels a dividing point.
00min00sec
10min00sec
MENU
Exit OK
OK
180
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the i button to delete
unwanted segments.
The screen to select segment(s) to delete
is displayed.
Available operations
Press the 3 button to exit the screen.
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The movie is divided at the specified
points and the unwanted segments are
deleted from it. And then the divided
movie is saved as separate files and
displayed on the screen.
Four-way controller (45) Moves the selection frame
4 button Confirms/cancels a selection of a segment to
delete
Specify the dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the
movie. When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in
reverse order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). While specifying
dividing point(s), you cannot select the frames prior to the last selected frame
as a dividing point, or cancel the selections of the dividing point(s).
Select segments for deletion
00min02sec
10min00sec
OK
MENU
00min00sec
10min00sec
MENU
Cancel OK
OK
Cancel
Save as
Saves divided movie
as separate files
MENU
OK
OK
5 Using the Flash
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of X
and describes how to take pictures with the external flash.
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure
Mode ....................................................................182
Distance and Aperture when Using the
Built-in Flash .......................................................185
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash .......186
Using an External Flash (Optional) ...................187
182
5
Using the Flash
Flash Characteristics in Each
Exposure Mode
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur
effect.
• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking a
flash photograph.
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient
brightness.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.
• You can set the desired aperture value to take a flash photograph when
you want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a
slow shutter speed (p.70) that reduces camera shake. The slowest
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.
You can use slow-speed-sync in b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting
portraits with the sunset in the background. Both the portrait and the
background are captured beautifully.
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Using the Slow-speed Sync
• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function
or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera
shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.
183
5
Using the Flash
1
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.
2
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
4
Select G or H and press the 4 button.
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the
background.
5
Take a picture.
1
Set the mode dial to b, L or a .
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
3
Select E or F and press the 4 button.
4
Set the shutter speed (for b mode) or shutter speed and
aperture value (for L or a mode).
Set so a proper exposure is obtained at a shutter speed of 1/180 second
or slower.
5
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
6
Take a picture.
Using e/K/c Mode
Using b/L/a Mode
184
Using the Flash
5
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects
depending on when the flash is discharged.
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing light behind it.
1
Set the mode dial to any mode other than B, M or C.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
3
Select I or k and press the 4 button.
4
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
5
Take a picture.
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid
camera shake.
Slow-speed Sync
(Leading Curtain Sync)
Trailing Curtain Sync
185
Using the Flash
5
Distance and Aperture when Using
the Built-in Flash
Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.
*1
This can be used when [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu is set to [On].
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *
* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.
Example: When the sensitivity is ISO 100 and the aperture value is F2.8
L1 = 13 ÷ 2.8 = approx. 4.6 (m)
L2 = 4.6 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.9 (m)
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.9 m to 4.6 m.
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the
distance is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7
m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners, light is distributed
unevenly and a picture may be overexposed.
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example: When the sensitivity is ISO 100 and shooting distance is 4 m,
the aperture value is:
F = 13 ÷ 4 = 3.25
If the resulting number (3.25, in the above example) is not available
as a lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the
above example) is generally used.
Sensitivity
Built-in Flash Guide Number
Sensitivity
Built-in flash guide number
ISO 100 Approx. 13 ISO 3200 Approx. 73.5
ISO 200 Approx. 18.4 ISO 6400 Approx. 104
ISO 400 Approx. 26 ISO 12800 Approx. 147
ISO 800 Approx. 36.8
ISO 25600
*1
Approx. 208
ISO 1600 Approx. 52
ISO 51200
*1
Approx. 294
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
186
5
Using the Flash
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in
Flash
Depending on the lens used with the X, even if a lens without a hood
is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may be
limited due to vignetting.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without
problems.
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Available depending on other factors
Lens Name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)
DA12-24mm F4ED AL
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)
FA
E
300mm F2.8ED (IF)
FA
E
600mm F4ED (IF)
FA
E
250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)
Lens Name Restrictions
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is
less than 20 mm.
DA16-45mm F4ED AL
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or
when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA
E
16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or
when the focal length is 35 mm and the
shooting distance is less than 1.5 m,
vignetting may occur.
DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or
when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is
less than 35 mm.
FA
E
28-70mm F2.8AL
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is
28 mm and the shooting distance is less than
1m.
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8 Built-in flash always discharges fully.
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8 Built-in flash always discharges fully.
187
Using the Flash
5
Using an External Flash (Optional)
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for
details.
(z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available)
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ
unit and the built-in flash is required.
Flash
Camera Function
Built-in
Flash
AF540FGZ
AF360FGZ
AF200FG
AF160FC
Red-eye reduction flash zz z
Auto flash discharge zz z
After the flash is charged, the camera
automatically switches to the flash sync
speed.
zz z
Aperture value is automatically set in e
mode and b mode.
zz z
P-TTL auto flash (appropriate sensitivity:
ISO 100 to 3200)
z
*1
z
*1
z
*1
Slow-speed Sync zz z
Flash exposure compensation zz z
AF assist light of external flash × z ×
Trailing Curtain Sync
*2
zz ×
Contrast-control-sync flash mode #
*3
z #
*4
Slave flash × z ×
High-speed flash sync × z ×
Wireless flash #
*4
z
*5
×
Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.
188
Using the Flash
5
You can use [P-TTL Auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and
confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is
backlit, etc.) using the camera 77-segment metering sensor. The flash
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
2
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
3
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL Auto].
4
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then
take a picture.
Using P-TTL Auto Mode
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT size
to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital Camera, the
difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera and the
X
is
automatically calculated based on the difference in angle of view and is
displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens).
The conversion indicator appears and the FORMAT size indicator
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the
X is on (it
returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is
turned off).
* Using wide-angle panel
Lens Focal Length
85mm
/77mm
50mm 35mm
28mm
/24mm
20mm 18mm
Exposure metering timer
Off
85mm 70mm 50mm 35mm 28mm
24mm
*
Exposure metering timer
On
58mm 48mm 34mm 24mm 19mm
16mm
*
189
5
Using the Flash
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a
picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.
2
Set the exposure mode to b or a.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
4
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (High-speed
flash sync).
5
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then
take a picture.
• P-TTL Auto is only available with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit.
•The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer to
the external flash manual.
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash
mode is C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for Daylight-Sync
shooting.
• Never press the E button when any external flash unit is attached to the
camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at
once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
(p.194)
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode
•The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
•
High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster
than 1/180 sec.
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the exposure mode is set to p
(Bulb).
190
Using the Flash
5
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the
built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
Using Flash in Wireless Mode
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use
high-speed flash sync in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in
combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the
camera to SLAVE.
Setting the Channel for the External Flash
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is
displayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the
external flash.
191
5
Using the Flash
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in
combination with the built-in flash.
1
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Select r and press the 4
button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
The channel for the built-in flash is
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel. The factory default setting is
CH1.
Using the Built-in Flash in Wireless Mode
• r cannot be set when the exposure mode is set to B (Green).
• When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)), d (Mirror
Lock-up) or e (Mirror Lock-up remote control), or the lens aperture is not
set to the s position, r cannot be selected.
Flash Mode
Wireless Mode
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
0.0
Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless
mode.
Set in [21. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.92).
1On
Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default
setting)
2 Off Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.
HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.
192
Using the Flash
5
Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash
Unit
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on
the camera, and place it at the desired location.
2
Set the camera flash to r mode, and press the E button.
3
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take
a picture.
Using a Combination of External Flash Units
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
2
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place
it at the desired location.
3
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take
a picture.
Wireless Shooting
MASTER
Sets the camera to discharge both the flash directly
connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit.
CONTROL
Sets the camera to discharge the flash directly connected
to the camera as a control flash only, not as the main
flash.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing
high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.
193
5
Using the Flash
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between
the flash units before the flash is discharged.
Press the shutter release button fully.
È
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays the flash mode of the camera).
2 The wireless remote flash emits a test flash (relays confirmation
of subject).
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).
* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash
one more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb
(High-speed flash sync) is set.
4 The wireless remote flash discharges.
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the
camera is set to [MASTER] or [21. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.191) is set
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.
Red-Eye Reduction
As with the built-in flash, the red-eye reduction function is available
with an external flash. However, this function may not be available on
some flashes or may have restrictions for usage conditions. Refer to
the chart on p.187.
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice
even when only an external flash is used. (p.80)
• If the red-eye reduction function of the built-in flash is used when the
external flash is set as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the
pre-flash for red-eye reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use
the red-eye reduction function when using a slave unit.
194
Using the Flash
5
When using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have a
wireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter F
G (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these
with the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the
tripod screw.
Only a P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.
When combining with the built-in flash
Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord
Trailing Curtain Sync
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync mode, the built-in
flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully
charged before shooting.
195
5
Using the Flash
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with
the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external
flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).
Refer to the manual of the flash for details.
When combining two or more external flashes
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension
Cords
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
196
Using the Flash
5
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of
light discharged from multiple units.
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.
Refer to p.194 for details.
2
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrast-
control-sync mode.
3
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are
fully charged and then take a picture.
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit)
: 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the built-
in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-
in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
197
5
Using the Flash
You can connect an external flash to the
camera with a sync cord by using the X-sync
socket.
Remove the Sync socket 2P cap and
connect a sync cord to the X-sync socket.
X-sync Socket
• The use of high-voltage or high-current external flashes may cause a camera
breakdown.
• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center of the sync plug is minus) cannot
be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.
• When a sync cord is connected to the X-sync socket, linked functions will not
work.
• To prevent vignetting caused from Trailing Curtain Sync, it is recommended
to take a test shot using a shutter speed one level slower than the flash sync
speed.
•
The contact of the X-sync socket is not dust-proof and water-resistant. Attach
the provided Sync socket 2P cap when not in use.
Memo
198
6 Shooting Settings
This chapter describes how to set the save format for
pictures taken and other settings.
Setting a File Format ..........................................200
Setting the White Balance .................................205
Correcting Images ..............................................214
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .....................222
Storing Frequently Used Settings ....................227
200
6
Shooting Settings
Setting a File Format
You can select the number of recorded pixels from p, J, P and i.
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file
size. The file size will also vary according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
The default setting is p.
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the
quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of
other factors.
1
Select [JPEG Recorded Pixels] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of recorded
pixels and press the 4 button.
When the number of recorded pixels is
changed, the number of pixels appears at
the top left of the screen and the number
of recordable images for that setting
appears at the top right of the screen.
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels
Recorded Pixels Pixels Paper Size
p 4928×3264
14"×17" / A2 paper
J 3936×2624
10"×12" / A3 paper
P 3072×2048
8"×10" / A4 paper
i 1728×1152
5"×7" / A5 paper
File Format JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1204928x3264
16M
10M
6M
2M
201
6
Shooting Settings
You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The file size will
also vary according to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default
setting is C (Best).
1
Select [JPEG Quality] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a quality level and press
the 4 button.
When the quality level is changed, the
number of recordable images at that
quality level appears at the top right of the
screen.
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Setting the JPEG Quality Level
Z Premium
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.
Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.
C Best
D Better
E Good
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
120
JPEG
16M
202
Shooting Settings
6
You can set the format of image files.
1
Select [File Format] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a file format.
When the file format is changed, the
number of recordable images appears at
the top right of the screen.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Setting a File Format
JPEG
Captures images in JPEG format. (default setting)
You can change the number of recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded
Pixels] and the image quality level in [JPEG Quality].
RAW
RAW format is a CMOS sensor output format saved without
processing.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not
applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original
information. When you perform the development process by using
RAW Development function (p.271), or using the provided software
(PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a
computer, you can create JPEG images with these effects.
RAW+
Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the |/Y button, you
can press the |/Y button to temporarily change the file format and
save an image in both file formats. (p.203)
When Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is
set, the file format is set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the file
format, turn these functions off.
OK
File Format JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
120
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
203
6
Shooting Settings
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW
File Format] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu
(p.90) when capturing images in RAW
format.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the |/Y button, you can
temporarily change the file format.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [|/Y
Button] and press the four-way controller (5).
The [|/Y Button] screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [One Push File Format]
and press the 4 button.
Setting the RAW File Format
PEF
PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)
DNG
General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems
Temporarily Changing the File Format using the
|/Y Button
Cancel
MENU
123 45
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format
ISO
NR
AUTO
OK
OK
sRGB
NR
AUTO
PEF
DNG
RAW/Fx Button
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Electronic Level
Digital Preview
Composition Adjust.
One Push File Format
RAW
Exposure Bracketing
204
Shooting Settings
6
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Cancel after 1
shot] and use the four-way
controller (45) to select O or P.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format
when the |/Y button is pressed.
7
Press the four-way controller
(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a file
format when the |/Y button
is pressed.
8
Press the 4 button.
9
Press the 3 button three times.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
O
The recording format returns to the original file format after a
picture is taken. (default setting)
P
The setting is canceled when the following operations are
performed.
-the |/Y button is pressed again
-the Q button or 3 button is pressed
- the main switch is turned off
- the mode dial is turned
RAW/Fx Button
Cancel after 1 shot
One Push File Format
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
MENU
RAW
RAW/Fx Button
Cancel after 1 shot
One Push File Format
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
205
Shooting Settings
6
Setting the White Balance
White balance is a function for adjusting the color of an image so that white
objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied with the
color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F (Auto), or
to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.
*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise
colors.
*2 CTE = Color Temperature Enhancement
Item Setting
Color Temperature
*1
F
Auto
Automatically adjusts the white balance.
(default setting)
Approx. 4,000 to
8,000K
G
Daylight For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K
H
Shade
For use when taking pictures in the shade.
It reduces the bluish color tones in a picture.
Approx. 8,000K
^
Cloudy
For use when taking pictures on cloudy days.
Approx. 6,000K
J
Fluorescent
Light
For use when taking pictures under
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of
fluorescent light.
D Fluorescent Light Daylight Color
N Fluorescent Light Daylight White
W Fluorescent Light Cool White
L Fluorescent Light Warm White
Approx. 6,500K
Approx. 5,000K
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K
I
Tungsten
Light
For use when taking pictures under light
bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces
the reddish color tones in a picture.
Approx. 2,850K
L
Flash
For use when taking pictures using the
built-in flash.
Approx. 5,400K
CTE
*2
Use this to keep and strengthen the color
tone of the light source in the image.
-
K
Manual 1-3
Use this to manually adjust the white
balance according to the lighting so that
white objects appear as a natural white.
You can save three settings.
-
K
Color
Temperature
1~3
Use figures to set the color temperature.
You can save three settings.
-
White balance is fixed to F when Cross Processing is set.
206
Shooting Settings
6
1
Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.
The [White Balance] screen appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the white balance.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Main switch (|) Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the setting applied.
L button Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
• The camera automatically performs fine-tuning even when the light source is
specified. The color temperature of the light source is fixed when [10. WB
Adjustable Range] is set to [Fixed] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.91).
• Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set the
white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],
[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [11. WB When Using Flash] of the [A Custom
Setting 2] menu (p.91).
Cancel Check
White Balance
Auto
OK
OK
MENU
AE.L
CTE
K1
207
6
Shooting Settings
You can fine-tune the white balance setting.
1
Perform the desired settings in Step 2 on p.206.
2
Press the four-way controller (5).
The fine-tuning screen appears.
3
Fine-tune the white balance.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Fine-tuning the White Balance
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green
(G) and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)
and amber (A).
| button Resets the adjustment value.
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured by pressing the
shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).
Cancel Check
Shade
OK
OK
MENU
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
G1 ±0
±0
208
Shooting Settings
6
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when
taking pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store
delicate shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance
preset values provided in the camera. This provides the optimum white
balance for your surroundings. Up to three settings can be saved.
1
Select K in Step 2 on p.206 and press the four-way
controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select K1 to K3 and
press the four-way controller
(5).
3
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white
area as the subject.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.
5
Use the rear e-dial (S) to select
the entire screen or spot area for
the measuring range.
Adjusting the White Balance Manually
Cancel Check
White Balance
Manual 1
OK
OK
MENU
AE.L
CTE
K1
1
3
2
1
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1
1
209
6
Shooting Settings
6
When a spot area is selected, use the four-way controller
(2345) to move the frame to the position you want to
measure.
7
Press the 4 button.
The white balance fine-tuning screen
appears when measuring is completed.
Adjust the white balance as necessary.
(p.207)
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
9
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust
the white balance.
• The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to
remeasure the white balance.
• If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance
may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct amount level
before adjusting the white balance.
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot be
measured. Adjust the white balance in any exposure mode other than C
before recording a movie.
Cancel Check
Manual
White Balance
Adjust
OK
OK
MENU
SHUTTER
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
±0 ±0
±0
AE.L
1
1
210
Shooting Settings
6
Use figures to set the color temperature. Up to three settings can be
saved.
1
Select K in Step 2 on p.206 and press the four-way
controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select K1 to K3 and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Color Temperature] screen appears.
3
Adjust the color temperature
with the front or rear e-dial.
Color temperature steps vary depending on the e-dial.
*1 The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change the
step units to [Mired] in [13. Color Temperature Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 2]
menu (p.91). However, figures are converted to Kelvin and displayed.
You can also use the steps in “Fine-tuning the White Balance” (p.207) for
fine-tuning.
Adjusting the White Balance with Color
Temperature
E-dial Kelvin Mired
*1
Front (R) 1 Step (100K) 1 Step (20M)
Rear (S) 10 Steps (1,000K) 5 Steps (100M)
Cancel Check
Color
K1
5000K
OK
OK
MENU
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
±0 ±0
±0
Temperature
211
6
Shooting Settings
4
Press the 4 button.
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the [White Balance]
screen.
Turn the main switch to | to display Digital Preview with the set color
temperature.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Color Temperature
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises,
and towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature
describes this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature
(K: Kelvin). This camera is capable of setting the white balance to
enable taking pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting
conditions.
2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 12000
[
K
]
Candle flame
Oil lamp
Tungsten light
Halogen light bulb
White (Fluorescent light)
Daylight
Cloudy
Shade
Clear sky
Daylight (Fluorescent light)
Neutral white (Fluorescent light)
Flash
Red tint Blue tint
212
Shooting Settings
6
You can select a color space to use.
Set in [Color Space] of the [A Rec. Mode 3]
menu (p.90).
Setting the Color Space
sRGB Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)
AdobeRGB Sets to AdobeRGB color space.
The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as
shown below.
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.301)
Cancel
MENU
123 45
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format PEF
ISO
NR
AUTO
OK
OK
NR
AUTO
sRGB
Adobe
RGB
Color Space
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called the
Color Space.
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and
AdobeRGB.
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for
occupational uses such as industrial printing.
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.
213
6
Shooting Settings
You can copy the white balance setting of a captured image and save it as
Manual White Balance. Up to three settings can be saved.
1
In Playback mode, display the image with the white
balance setting you want to copy.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select K (Save
as Manual WB) and press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to select a different image.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a number and press the
4 button.
The white balance setting of the selected
image is saved to Manual White Balance
and the camera switches to Capture
mode. The white balance setting is K
(Manual).
Saving the White Balance Setting of a
Captured Image
Only the white balance setting of still pictures captured with this camera can be
copied. The following images cannot be selected.
- Multi-exposure image
- Index image
- Still pictures captured from a movie
Save as Manual 2
Save as Manual 3
100-0105
100-0105
Save as Manual 1
Saves this image's White
Balance settings as a custom
selection
Saves this image's White
Balance settings as a custom
selection
OK
OK
Cancel
MENU
214
6
Shooting Settings
Correcting Images
The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted for when
taking pictures.
Adjusts the brightness and reduces the occurrence of overexposed and
underexposed areas.
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of
overexposed and underexposed areas.
1
Select [D-Range Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Highlight
Correction] and press the four-way controller (5).
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Off] or [On] and press
the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shadow
Correction] and press the four-way controller (5).
Adjusting Brightness
D-Range Setting
D-Range Setting
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Available sensitivity range is
currently ISO 100-12800
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
215
6
Shooting Settings
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Off], [Low],
[Medium] or [High] and press the
4 button.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range. Takes three images
(-3EV underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and +3EV
overexposed) to create a single composite image with them.
1
Select [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.
When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set to ISO
200. When [3. Expanded Sensitivity] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 1]
menu (p.91), the minimum sensitivity is set to ISO 160.
HDR Capture
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
- when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb) or M (Flash X-sync Speed)
• When HDR Capture is set, the following functions are not available.
- Drive modes other than 9 (Single Frame Shooting), g (Self-timer (12s)),
Z (Self-timer (2s)), h (Remote Control) or i (Remote Control (3s delay))
- Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure
- Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or Cross Processing (The function
selected last is used.)
• During HDR Capture, multiple images are combined together to create a
single image, so it will take time to save an image.
D-Range Setting
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
OFF
OFF
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
216
Shooting Settings
6
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Off], [Auto],
[Standard], [Strong 1], [Strong 2]
or [Strong 3].
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Auto Align] and use the
four-way controller (45) to
select P or O.
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
P
[Shake Reduction] is fixed to l (Off). Use a tripod to prevent
camera shake when taking pictures. (default setting)
O
The Shake Reduction function operates according to the Shake
Reduction setting at that point. HDR Capture can be used without a
tripod.
[Program Line] (p.102) is fixed to l (Hi-speed Priority) and
[AUTO ISO Parameters] (p.97) is fixed to a (Fast).
HDR Capture
Auto Align
HDR Capture
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
HDR
HDR
AUTO
AUTO
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR Capture
MENU
Auto Align
HDR Capture
HDR
HDR
AUTO
AUTO
217
6
Shooting Settings
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.
• When both [Shake Reduction] and [Auto Align] are set to on, be careful of the
following points.
- Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture
does not change while the three images are taken. If there is a great
difference of the composition between three images, [Auto Align] may not
be possible.
- Images taken with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and blur.
Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.
- When the exposure mode is set to e (Hyper-program), [Program Line] is
set to l (Hi-speed Priority).
- When the ISO sensitivity is set to AUTO, the sensitivity can be raised more
easily than normal.
- [Auto Align] may not be possible for lenses that have a focal length
exceeding 100 mm.
- When the entire subject is checkered or has a uniform surface, [Auto Align]
may not be possible.
218
Shooting Settings
6
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to
lens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a
zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in
the image appear curved.
Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the
magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths
of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Lateral chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.
Lens Correction
Pincushion distortion Barrel distortion
219
6
Shooting Settings
1
Select [Lens Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Lens Correction] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj].
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [OFF] or [ON].
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA lenses
(p.337). [Lens Correction] cannot be selected when an incompatible lens is
attached.
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a
close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the
lens.
• When the Lens Correction function is activated, it may take longer to display
Instant Review and the shooting speed for continuous shooting may be
slower.
• The effect of the Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some
cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.
When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.274)
Lens Correction
Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
220
Shooting Settings
6
Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit in the X-Y direction or rotation direction
for a better composition position and a more level camera. Use this when
you want to adjust the composition, such as when using a tripod.
1
Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Composition Adjust.] screen appears.
2
Select [Start Adjustment] and
press the 4 button.
To start adjusting the composition from
the previous position, use the four-way
controller (23) to select [Recall
Previous Position] and use the four-way
controller (45) to switch to O.
Live View is displayed and the
composition can be adjusted.
3
Adjust the composition.
The amount of compensation (the
number of steps) is displayed at the top
right of the screen.
Available operations
Adjusting the Composition
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the composition up, down, left or right.
Adjust up to 24 steps (approximately ±1.5 mm) on
the image sensor.
Rear e-dial (S) Adjusts the level of the composition when the
amount of adjustment is less than 16 steps (±1.0
mm) up or down, or to the left or right. Up to 8
steps (approximately ±1°) can be adjusted.
| button Resets the adjustment value.
Composition Adjust.
Recall Previous Position
OK
OK
Start Adjustment
Please note: depending on the
lens, adjusting the composition
may cause vignetting
MENU
Cancel
Adjust the composition of
the image
Adjust the composition of
the image
0
0
0
0
0
0
OK
OK
MENU
221
6
Shooting Settings
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.
• The saved adjustment value is reset when Live View is ended.
• When using the composition adjustment function frequently, you can assign
the function to the |/Y button. (p.285)
222
6
Shooting Settings
Setting the Image Finishing Tone
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting. Select from the
following nine modes for the image finishing tone: Bright (default setting),
Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach Bypass, Reversal
Film and Monochrome. You can adjust the following parameters.
Setting Custom Image
Parameter Setting Setting Values
Saturation
Sets the color saturation.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
-4 to +4
Hue
Sets the color.
• Not available when [Bleach Bypass],
[Reversal Film] or [Monochrome] is
selected.
-4 to +4
High/Low
Key Adj
Changes the brightness of the image.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is
selected.
-4 to +4
Contrast
Sets the image contrast.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is
selected.
-4 to +4
Sharpness
Sets the sharpness of the image outlines.
You can switch to [Fine Sharpness] or
[Extra Sharpness], which makes image
outlines even thinner and sharper. (Not
available when the exposure mode is set
to C (Movie).)
-4 to +4
Filter Effect
Changes the contrast to appear as if a
B&W color filter was used. Set the filter
color.
• Available only when [Monochrome] is
selected.
None/Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Infrared
Filter
Toning
Sets a color tone for [Bleach Bypass].
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment
(- direction) and warm tone adjustment
(+ direction) for [Monochrome].
• Available only when [Bleach Bypass] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
Bleach Bypass: Off/
Green/Yellow/Orange/
Red/Magenta/Purple/
Blue/Cyan
Monochrome: -4 to +4
223
6
Shooting Settings
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.
The screen to select a custom image appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image finishing tone.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose a parameter you want
to change.
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.
The background image changes according to the settings.
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.
Image finishing tone is fixed to [Bright] and the parameters cannot be changed
in the following conditions.
- when the exposure mode is set to B (Green)
- when Cross Processing is set
Bright
Bright
Cancel Check OK
OK
MENU
AE.L
R
Y
G
C
B
M
R
Y
G
C
B
M
F
F
EX
EX
Cancel Check OK
OK
MENU
AE.L
R
Y
G
C
B
M
R
Y
G
C
B
M
F
F
Portrait
Portrait
EX
EX
224
Shooting Settings
6
Available operations
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Front e-dial (R) Switches between enabling and disabling contrast
settings.
Rear e-dial (S) Switches between [Sharpness], [Fine Sharpness]
and [Extra Sharpness]. When set to [Fine
Sharpness] or [Extra Sharpness], image outlines
can be captured with more detail.
| button Resets the set value.
Main switch (|) Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the setting applied. (Not available during
Live View.)
L button Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button. (Not available during Live
View.)
225
6
Shooting Settings
Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in the
wrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors and
contrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is done
internally.
1
Select [Cross Processing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), select from [Movie] in the
[A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.171)
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select an item and press
the 4 button.
Select from [Off], [Preset 1-3], [Random]
and [Favorite 1-3].
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Setting Cross Processing
• When Cross Processing is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG] and cannot
be changed. You cannot use Cross Processing when the file format is set to
[RAW] or [RAW+].
• When Cross Processing is set, the following functions and operation are not
available.
- Multi-exposure
- Extended Bracketing or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used.)
- Changing the settings of White Balance and Custom Image
Cross Processing
Cross Processing
Save Settings
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
OFF
OFF
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
3
3
2
2
226
Shooting Settings
6
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If you
are able to take a cross processed image that you like, you can save the
Cross Processing settings used in that image. A total of 3 Cross
Processing settings can be saved for still pictures and movies.
1
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Save Settings] in
Step 2 on p.225 and press the
four-way controller (5).
The camera will search for cross
processed images starting from the most
recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is
displayed while searching.) When a cross
processed image is found, the screen to save the settings appears.
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross
processed image] appears.
2
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a cross processed image.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as
Favorite 1], [Save as Favorite 2] or [Save as Favorite 3] and
press the 4 button.
The setting of the selected image is saved to [Favorite 1 - 3].
4
Press the 3 button twice to finish saving.
Saving the Cross Processing Setting of a Captured Image
To save Cross Processing setting for movies, set from [Movie] in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu with the mode dial set to C (Movie).
Cross Processing
Cross Processing
MENU
Save Settings
OFF
OFF
100-0001
100-0001
1
1
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Save as Favorite 3
Save as Favorite 2
Save as Favorite 1
Saves this image's Cross
Saves this image's Cross
Processing settings
Processing settings
227
Shooting Settings
6
Storing Frequently Used Settings
You can save the current camera settings in the A mode and easily
retrieve them.
The following settings can be stored.
Saves the settings to A. Up to five different settings can be saved.
1
Make the necessary settings.
2
Select [Save USER Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Save USER Mode] screen appears.
• Exposure Mode (other than B and C)•High-ISO NR
•Drive Mode •Slow Shutter Speed NR
•
Flash Mode/Flash Exposure Compensation
• D-Range Setting
• White Balance • HDR Capture
• Sensitivity/ISO AUTO Setting • Custom Image
• EV compensation value • Cross Processing
• Program Line • Digital Filter
• Exposure Bracketing • Shake Reduction/
Horizon Correction
•
Extended Bracketing (Bracketing Amount/Type)
• JPEG Recorded Pixels • Lens Correction
• JPEG Quality • Color Space
• File Format • E-Dial Programming/
Button Customization
• RAW File Format
• AUTO AF Point Setting • [A Custom Setting 1-4]
menu settings
The A mode cannot be set when the mode dial is set to B (Green) or C
(Movie) mode.
Saving the Settings
228
Shooting Settings
6
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Save Settings]
and press the four-way controller
(5).
The [Save Settings] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [A1] to [A5]
and press the four-way controller
(5).
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Save] and press the
4 button.
The settings are saved and the camera
returns to the [Save USER Mode] screen.
You can change the name of the A mode in which you saved settings.
1
Select [Rename USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the
Settings” and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Rename USER Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [A1] to
[A5] and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Editing a Setting Name
Save USER Mode
Save Settings
Rename USER Mode
Check Saved Settings
Reset USER Mode
MENU
Save Settings
USER1
USER2
USER3
USER4
USER5
MENU
USER
1
USER
2
USER
3
USER
4
USER
5
Save Settings
Save
Cancel
Saves current settings in
USER1 custom mode
OK
OK
USER
1
MENU
229
6
Shooting Settings
3
Enter the text.
Up to 18 single-byte
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols can be
entered.
Available operations
4
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish] and press the 4 button.
The name is changed.
Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to change the names of other A modes.
5
Press the 3 button.
1
Select [Check Saved Settings] in Step 3 of “Saving the
Settings” (p.227) and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Check Saved Settings] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [A1] to
[A5] and press the four-way controller (5).
The current settings saved in the selected A mode are displayed.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Rear e-dial (S) Moves the text input cursor.
| button
Switches between upper and lower case letters.
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
i button Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.
Checking the Saved USER Settings
Rename USER Mode
USER1
Cancel
Delete One Character
Enter
Finish
OK
MENU
USER
1
Text selection
cursor
Text input cursor
230
Shooting Settings
6
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Save USER
Mode] screen.
You can easily retrieve saved settings.
1
Set the mode dial to A.
The A mode guide appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) or the rear e-dial (S) to
select [A1] to [A5].
Use the four-way controller (23) to
check the saved settings.
The saved settings are retrieved.
3
Change the settings as
necessary.
The exposure mode can be changed in
[Exposure Mode] of the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu.
Using Saved USER Settings
USER1
P
16
M
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±1
±0
±0
2.0x5
200-800
-
0.5
BA
Adobe
RGB
JPEG
+1.0
ISO
AUTO
AWB
G1 A1
WB
MENU
USER
1
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
ON
11
11
1
1
ON
ON
OK
OK
P
09/09/2010
RAW Tv
Av
Cancel AF
10:30AM
RAW
AF
P
USER1
USER
1
USER Mode sRGB
Exposure Mode PEF
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
Lens Correction
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 234
P
Sv
Tv
Av
TAv
M
B
X
231
6
Shooting Settings
4
Take a picture.
Changes the settings saved in A1 to A5.
1
Perform Steps 1 to 3 of “Using Saved USER Settings”
(p.230).
2
Perform Steps 2 to 5 of “Saving the Settings” (p.227).
The settings are changed and resaved.
•The A mode guide appears for 30 seconds regardless of the [Guide
Display] setting in the [R Set-up 1] menu.
•[A1] to [A5] can also be selected
from [USER Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode
1] menu.
• [USER Mode] and [Exposure Mode] are
displayed in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu
only when the mode dial is set to A.
• The settings changed in Step 3 are not
saved as A mode settings. When the
camera is turned off, settings return to the
original saved settings.
Changing the Settings
USER Mode
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
sRGB
Exposure Mode PEF
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
Lens Correction
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
11
11
USER
1
USER
2
USER
3
USER
4
USER
5
232
Shooting Settings
6
Resets the settings saved in A1 to A5 to the default settings.
1
Select [Reset USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the
Settings” (p.227) and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset USER Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [A1] to
[A5] and press the four-way controller (5).
3
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The A mode settings return to the
default values.
Resetting to Default Settings
Reset USER Mode
OK
OK
Cancel
Reset
Resets USER1 custom mode
to default settings and name
USER
1
MENU
7 Playback Functions
This chapter describes how to use the various playback
functions in Playback mode.
Playback Functions Operation ..........................234
Setting the Playback Display Method ...............236
Enlarging Images ...............................................237
Displaying Multiple Images ...............................238
Playing Back Images Continuously ..................246
Rotating Images .................................................249
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................250
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ......254
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .........256
234
7
Playback Functions
Playback Functions Operation
Make settings related to playing back images in the playback mode palette
or [Q Playback] menu.
Press the four-way controller (3) in
Playback mode to display the playback
mode palette.
You can display the playback mode palette
even when a movie is paused.
Refer to “Using the Menus” (p.42) for details on how to use the menus.
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items
Item Function Page
s Image Rotation
*1
Rotates images. p.249
D Digital Filter
*1
Changes the color tone of images, adds
softening and slimming effects, or
adjusts the brightness.
p.265
n Resize
*1
*2
Changes the number of recorded pixels
and quality level of the captured image
and saves it as a new file.
p.262
o Cropping
*1
Cuts out only the desired area of the
picture and saves it as a new image.
p.263
u Slideshow Plays back the images one after another. p.246
Exit
Image Rotation
Rotates captured images.
OK
OK
MENU
Useful for image playback on
TV and other display devices
235
7
Playback Functions
*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.
You can perform the following settings in the
[Q Playback] menu.
Press the 3 button in Playback mode to
display the [Q Playback 1] menu.
K Save as Manual WB
*1
You can copy the white balance setting
of a captured image and save it as
Manual White Balance.
p.213
h RAW Development
*1
Converts RAW images to JPEG format. p.271
p Index
*1
Joins a number of images together and
creates a new image with them.
p.243
g Image Comparison
*1
Displays two images side-by-side. p.241
[ Movie Editing
*3
Divides a movie and extracts segments from it.
p.179
Z Protect
Protects images from being accidentally
erased.
p.254
r DPOF
*1
*2
Sets the DPOF settings. p.309
Playback Menu Setting Items
Menu
Item Function Page
Q1
Slideshow
Plays back the images one after another.
You can set how images will be displayed
in the slideshow.
p.246
Quick Zoom
Sets the initial magnification when
enlarging images.
p.236Bright/Dark Area
Sets whether or not to display the Bright/
Dark Area warning during playback.
Auto Image Rotation
Sets whether to rotate images shot with the
camera held vertically when playing back.
Delete All Images You can delete all saved images at once. p.253
Item Function Page
236
7
Playback Functions
Setting the Playback Display Method
You can set the initial magnification when enlarging images, whether to
display the Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to automatically rotate
images that are shot with the camera held vertically in Playback mode.
1
Select [Quick Zoom] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the magnification and
press the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],
[×4], [×8], [×16] or [×32].
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Bright/Dark Area] and
use the four-way controller (45)
to select O or P.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Image
Rotation] and use the four-way controller (45) to select
O or P.
5
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
O
During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the
rotation information when [23. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu (p.92) is set to [On] or image rotation information is
saved in [Image Rotation] (p.249). (default setting)
P The image is not automatically rotated during playback.
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
Delete All Images
Cancel
MENU
1
OK
OK
Off
X2
X4
X8
X16
X32
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
Delete All Images
Exit
MENU
Off
1
237
Playback Functions
7
Enlarging Images
Images can be magnified up to 32 times in Playback mode.
1
Use the four-way controller (
45
)
to select an image in Playback
mode.
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
right (toward y).
The image enlarges at each click (1.2 times
to 32 times).
Available operations
*The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You can
change this in [Quick Zoom] of the [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.236)
Four-way controller (2345) Moves the area to enlarge.
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)
/m button
Enlarges the image (up to 32 times).
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)
/| button
Reduces the image (up to 1.2 times*).
4 button Returns to the original size.
Front e-dial (R) Retains the magnification and the
position of the magnified area and
shows the previous/next image.
M button Switches information display on/off.
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant
Review (p.73), Digital Preview (p.138) or Live View (p.168).
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.675 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click
starts at 1.0 times.
2000 F5.6
JPEG
1/
100-0001
100-0001
200
ISO
100-0001
100-0001
x20
x20
238
7
Playback Functions
Displaying Multiple Images
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 thumbnail images on the monitor at the
same time. The default setting is nine image-display.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
left (toward f) in Playback
mode.
The multi-image display screen
appears.
Up to nine thumbnail images are
displayed at once.
Multi-image Display Screen
INFO
100-0001
Scroll bar
Selection frame
239
7
Playback Functions
Available operations
2
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
Images will be grouped and displayed by folder in which they are saved.
1
In the multi-image display
screen, turn the rear e-dial (S)
to the left (toward f) again.
The folder display screen appears.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the selection frame.
M button Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting]
screen. Use the four-way controller (45) to
select the number of images to display at the
same time.
(Display Type cannot be selected when
developing multiple RAW images (p.272).)
i button Selects multiple images and deletes them.
(p.250)
Icons such as C and ? are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image
display.
Displaying Images by Folder
INFO
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Display Type
Multi-img Display Setting
240
Playback Functions
7
2
Select the folder you want to
display.
The number of images saved in the
selected folder appears at the top right of
the screen.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.
Images will be grouped and displayed by the shooting date.
1
In the multi-image display
screen, press the M button.
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen
appears.
2
Press the M button again.
Four-way controller
(
2345)
Moves the selection frame.
i button
Deletes the selected folder and all the images in it. (p.252)
Displaying Images by the Shooting Date
(Calendar Display)
100
_
0105
12345
100 101 102
103 104 105
INFO
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Display Type
Multi-img Display Setting
241
7
Playback Functions
The calendar display screen appears.
Only the dates when pictures were taken
are displayed.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
You can display two images side-by-side.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image
Comparison) and press the 4 button.
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.
Four-way controller (23) Selects a shooting date.
Four-way controller (45) Selects an image taken on the selected
shooting date.
Rear e-dial (S) to the
right (y)
Displays the selected image. Turn to the left
(f) to return to the calendar display.
M button The camera returns to the multi-image display
screen.
i button Deletes selected images.
Comparing Images
INFO
Delete
9
22
24
27
10
7
10
13
16
2010.
WED
FRI
MON
THU
SUN
SUN
WED
SAT
2010.
2/5
Thumbnail
Number of images shot on this date
Shooting
242
Playback Functions
7
3
Select two images you want to
compare using the e-dials and
compare them at left and right.
Available operations
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.
4 button Moves the selection frame to the right image,
both images, and left image each time the
button is pressed.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the area to enlarge. When the selection
frame is placed on both images, you can
manipulate both images at the same time.
| button Returns a position of the enlarged area to the
center.
Front e-dial (R) When the selection frame is placed on the left
or right image, the previous or next image is
displayed.
Rear e-dial (S) Enlarges or reduces the image. When the
selection frame is placed on both images, you
can manipulate both images at the same time.
M button Switches information display On/Off.
i button When the selection frame is placed on the left
or right image, the selected image is deleted.
100-0001
100-0001
100-0001
100-0001
x2
x2
MENU
OK
x2
x2
243
7
Playback Functions
Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You
can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can select
the images to include in the index print or have them randomly-arranged.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)
and press the 4 button.
The [Index] screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a layout and press the
4 button.
You can select
o
(Thumbnail),
p
(Square),
q
(Random1),
r
(Random2),
s
(Random3) or
p
(Bubble).
Images are displayed according to the file
number (from the smallest number) for
o, and are displayed in random order for other layouts.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] and
press the four-way controller (5).
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of images
and press the 4 button.
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.
When the number of saved images is smaller
than the number selected, empty spaces will
appear when [Layout] is set to
o
and some
images may be duplicated for other layouts.
Joining Multiple Images (Index)
This function is not available for movies.
MENU
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
MENU
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
12
24
36
244
Playback Functions
7
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]
and press the four-way controller (5).
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the background color
and press the 4 button.
You can select a white or black
background.
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection] and
press the four-way controller (5).
10
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a type of image
selection and press the 4
button.
11
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Create an index image]
and press the 4 button.
The index image is created and a
confirmation screen appears.
u All images
Picks images automatically from all of the images
saved.
w Manual
Individually select images you want to include in
the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)]
and select the individual images.
x Folder name
Picks images automatically from the folder
selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder]
and select the folder.
MENU
12
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
MENU
12
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
MENU
12
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Create an index image
OK
245
7
Playback Functions
12
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]
and press the 4 button.
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode
and the index image is displayed.
Save The index image is saved as a P and C file.
Reshuffle
Reselects the images to be included in the index and
displays a new index image. However, if [Thumbnail] is
selected for [Layout], this item is not displayed.
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.
MENU
Cancel
Reshuffle
Save
OK
OK
246
7
Playback Functions
Playing Back Images Continuously
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card
successively in the slideshow.
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.
1
Select [Slideshow] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an item you want
to change.
The following items can be changed.
Setting the Slideshow Display
Item Description Setting
Interval
Select an image display
interval.
3sec. (default setting)/
5sec./10sec./30sec.
Screen
Effect
Select a transition effect when
the next image is displayed.
Off (default setting)/Fade/
Wipe/Stripe
Repeat
Playback
Set whether to start the
slideshow again from the
beginning after the last image is
displayed.
P (default setting)/O
Slideshow starts
Interval
Screen Effect
3sec.
Repeat Playback
Start
MENU
OK
OK
247
7
Playback Functions
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to change the setting and
press the 4 button.
1
Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.246 and press the 4 button.
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode palette
and press the 4 button.
The start screen is displayed and the
slideshow begins.
Available operations
Starting the Slideshow
4 button Pauses playback. Press again to resume
playback.
Four-way controller (4) Shows the previous image.
Four-way controller (5) Shows the next image.
Four-way controller (3) Stops playback.
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
Start
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
3sec.
5sec.
10sec.
30sec.
OK
Start
248
Playback Functions
7
2
Stop the slideshow.
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed
during playback or pause.
- the four-way controller (3) is pressed
*1
- the Q button is pressed
*1
- the 3 button is pressed
*1
- the shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully
*2
- the mode dial is turned
*2
- the = button is pressed
*2
- the main switch is turned to |
*2
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is
displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during a
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the
movie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.
249
Playback Functions
7
Rotating Images
When pictures are taken with X held vertically, the vertical position
sensor activates and rotation information is added to the image to enable
playback with the correct image orientation. You can change the rotation
information and save the image using the following procedure.
1
Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image
Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail
images are displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a desired
rotation direction and press the
4 button.
The image rotation information is saved.
• When [23. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.92) is
set to [Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.
• When [Auto Image Rotation] (p.236) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to O
(On), an image with rotation information is automatically rotated during
playback.
You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.
- when the image is protected
- when the image rotation information tag is not saved with the image
- when [Auto Image Rotation] (p.236) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to
P (Off)
MENU
OK
OK
Cancel
250
7
Playback Functions
Deleting Multiple Images
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
left (toward f) in Playback
mode.
The multi-image display screen appears.
2
Press the i button.
The screen to select the images to delete
is displayed.
The screen temporarily changes to 36-
image display when [Multi-img Display
Setting] (p.239) is set to 81-image
display.
3
Select the images to delete.
Deleting Selected Images
Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.
INFO
100-0001
Delete
OK
MENU
251
7
Playback Functions
Available operations
4
Press the i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Select & Delete].
6
Press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the selection frame.
4 button Adds O and selects an image. Press again to
return to P. Protected images (Z) cannot be
selected.
Rear e-dial (S) Displays a full screen display of the image
selected with the selection frame. When the
image is displayed full screen, press the four-way
controller (45) to display the previous or next
image.
Cancel
Select&Delete
All selected images will
be deleted
MENU
OK
OK
252
Playback Functions
7
You can delete a selected folder and all the images in it.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) two
clicks to the left (toward f) in
Playback mode.
The folder display screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a folder to
delete and press the i button.
The delete folder confirmation screen
appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete].
4
Press the 4 button.
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four-
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.
Deleting a Folder
100
_
0105
12345
100 101 102
103 104 105
Cancel
100
_
0105
Delete
All images in selected
folder will be deleted
OK
OK
Leave All
Delete All
3image(s)
Protected images are found
OK
OK
253
7
Playback Functions
You can delete all saved images at once.
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete All Images].
3
Press the 4 button.
All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four-
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.
Deleting All Images
Deleted images cannot be restored.
Cancel
Delete All Images
All images will be deleted
from memory
OK
OK
Leave All
Delete All
3image(s)
Protected images are found
OK
OK
254
7
Playback Functions
Protecting Images from Deletion
(Protect)
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
Z (Protect) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the protection setting method is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single Image] and
press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image to
protect.
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Protect].
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of the image.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is
formatted.
Protecting a Single Image
MENU
All Images
Single Image
OK
OK
Unprotect
100-0105
100-0105
Protect
MENU
OK
OK
255
7
Playback Functions
6
Press the 4 button.
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the
screen.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.
7
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to Playback mode.
1
Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.254 and press the 4
button.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Protect] and press the
4 button.
All images saved on the SD Memory Card
are protected.
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of all images.
Protecting All Images
Unprotect
Protect
MENU
Protects all images
OK
OK
256
7
Playback Functions
Connecting the Camera to an AV
Device
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video input
terminal or HDMI terminal and play back images.
Use the provided AV cable I-AVC7 to connect the camera to a device with
a video input terminal.
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cable
toward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect the cable
to the PC/AV terminal.
3
Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video input
terminal on the AV device.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.53)
•
For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating manual of
the AV device, and select a suitable video input terminal for connecting the camera.
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected
to the AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect
the camera to an AV device with the mini HDMI terminal. You cannot output
a movie using the video input terminal while recording.
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal
257
7
Playback Functions
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.63), the video
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video
output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.
1
Select [Video Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [NTSC] or [PAL] and
press the 4 button.
3
Press the 3 button.
The video output format is set.
Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,
monaural sound is played back.
Selecting the Video Output Format
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.289) to X (Destination), the video output
setting changes to the video output format for that city.
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name Date
Create New Folder
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2 34
±0
MSC
PAL
NTSC
258
Playback Functions
7
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a
device with an HDMI terminal.
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover and connect the HDMI cable to
the mini HDMI terminal.
3
Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI input
terminal on the AV device.
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in HDMI mode, and the camera information is
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal
• The camera has a mini HDMI terminal (Type C). Use a commercially
available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.
• Nothing is displayed on the camera monitor during HDMI output.
• If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the
sound is played back in stereo.
259
7
Playback Functions
Set the output signal format of the HDMI terminal.
1
Select [HDMI Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the HDMI output format.
*1 This depends on the selected video output format; [480p] for NTSC and [576p]
(720×576p) for PAL.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The HDMI output format is set.
Selecting the HDMI Output Format
Auto
The maximum size
corresponding to the AV
device and camera is
automatically selected.
(default setting)
1080i 1920×1080i
720p 1280×720p
480p
*1
720×480p
• When the HDMI output format is set to [1080i] or [720p], the display of the AV
device may appear with a screen design that differs from that displayed on
the camera.
• The Bright/Dark Area warning is not displayed during Live View.
• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), the output format is fixed to
[480p] regardless of the HDMI output format setting.
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2 34
IMGP
NTSC
±0
MSC
Auto
1080i
720p
480p
Memo
260
8 Processing Images
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and
edit RAW images.
Changing the Image Size ...................................262
Processing Images with Digital Filters .............265
Developing RAW Images ...................................271
262
8
Processing Images
Changing the Image Size
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, and
saves the image as a new file.
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected
image and saves it as a new image. The number of recorded pixels can be
reduced while still obtaining an image with good quality.
1
Select an image to resize in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
n (Resize) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select the desired image size.
You can select one of the image sizes
starting from one size smaller than that of
the original image. The selectable sizes
vary according to the original image size
and aspect ratio.
5
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to select the quality level.
You can select Z, C, D or E.
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and
Quality Level (Resize)
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be resized.
OK
OK
MENU
16M 10M
263
8
Processing Images
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The resized image is saved as a new
image.
Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a new
image.The aspect ratio can also be changed.
1
Select an image to crop in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
o (Cropping) and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop
appears on the screen.
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be cropped.
Cancel
Save as
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
MENU
OK
OK
264
Processing Images
8
4
Specify the size and position of
the area to crop by using
cropping frame.
Available operations
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The cropped image is saved as a new
image.
Rear e-dial (S) Changes the size of the cropping frame.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the cropping frame.
M button
Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2], [4:3],
[16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be rotated
from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.
| button Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.
| appears only when the cropping frame can
be rotated.
OK
MENU
INFO
3:2
Aspect Ratio
Image Rotation
MENU
3:2
±0°
Cancel
Save as
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
MENU
OK
OK
265
Processing Images
8
Processing Images with Digital
Filters
You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter Name Effect Parameter
Toy Camera
Creates an image that looks
as though it was shot with a
toy camera.
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Blur: +1 to +3
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Retro
Creates an image with the
look of an old photo.
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
High
Contrast
Enhances the contrast in
the image.
+1 to +5
Sketch Filter
Creates an image that looks as
though it was drawn with a pencil.
Contrast: Low/Medium/High
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON
Water Color
Creates an image that looks
as though it was painted.
Intensity: +1 to +3
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High
Pastel
Creates an image that looks as
though it was drawn with a crayon.
Weak/Medium/Strong
Posterization
Lessens the tone of the image
to create an image that looks
as though it was hand-drawn.
+1 to +5
Miniature
Blurs part of the image to
create a fake miniature
scene.
In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3
In-Focus Width: Narrow/Middle/Wide
In-Focus Plane Angle: Side/Vertical/
Positive Slope/Negative Slope
Blur: +1 to +3
Base
Parameter
Adj
Adjusts the parameters to
create the desired image.
Brightness: -8 to +8
Saturation: -3 to +3
Hue: -3 to +3
Contrast: -3 to +3
Sharpness: -3 to +3
Monochrome
Creates a monochrome
image such as a black-and-
white photo.
Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Infrared Filter
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
266
Processing Images
8
Color
Adds a color filter to the
image. Select from 18 filters
(6 colors × 3 tones).
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
Extract
Color
Extracts two specific colors
and shoots the rest of the
image in black and white.
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1: -2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2: -2 to +2
Soft
Creates an image with a
soft focus throughout the
image.
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Starburst
For taking pictures of night
scenes or lights reflected on
water with a special
sparkling look by adding
extra glitter to the highlights.
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/
Heart/Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
Fish-eye
Creates an image that looks
as though it was shot with a
fish-eye lens.
Weak/Medium/Strong
Slim
Changes the horizontal and
vertical ratio of images.
-8 to +8
HDR
Creates an image that looks like
a high dynamic range image.
Weak/Medium/Strong
Custom
Filter
Customize and save a filter
to your own preferences.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
Filter Name Effect Parameter
267
8
Processing Images
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback
mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital
Filter) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a filter appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a filter and
press the 4 button.
After selecting a filter, you can check the
effect on the screen.
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a different image.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a parameter
and the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using the
Digital Filter.
Applying the Digital Filter
Toy Camera
Toy Camera
OKExit
OK
MENU
100-0001
100-0001
OK
MENU
100-0001
100-0001
Red
Red
Slim
Slim
OK
MENU
100-0001
100-0001
Color Filter Slim Filter
268
Processing Images
8
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Use filters in
combination] or [Save as].
Select [Use filters in combination] when
you want to apply additional filters to the
same image.
8
Press the 4 button.
If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the camera returns to Step 4.
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new
image.
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and applies the same
filter effects to other images.
1
Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.
2
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Recreating filter
effects] and press the 4
button.
The history of the filter set for the selected
image appears.
Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.162), can be
combined to the same image.
Recreating Filter Effects
MENU
OK
Cancel
Save as
Use filters in combination
Continue selecting filters?
Continue selecting filters?
OK
MENU
Searching for the original image
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
OK
OK
269
8
Processing Images
4
To check the parameter details,
press the M button.
You can check the filter parameters.
5
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image for applying
the same filter effects and press
the 4 button.
You can only select an image that has not
been processed with a filter.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The filter-processed image is saved as a
new image.
Details
MENU
Reapplies following digital filter
effects from previous image
Reapplies following digital filter
effects from previous image
1. 5. 9.
13. 17. - -
2. 6.
10. 14. 18. - -
3. 7.
11. 15. 19. - -
4. 8.
12. 16. 20. - -
100-0001
100-0001
INFO
OK
OK
MENU
Performs digital filter
processing to this image
Performs digital filter
processing to this image
100-0001
100-0001
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
Save as
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
OK
OK
270
Processing Images
8
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter
application.
1
Select [Searching for the original
image] in Step 3 on p.268 and
press the 4 button.
The original image prior to digital filter
application is retrieved.
Searching for the Original Image
If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message
[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.
MENU
Searching for the original image
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
OK
OK
271
Processing Images
8
Developing RAW Images
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG or TIFF files.
1
Select a RAW image in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW
Development) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a development method is displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Developing a Single
Image] and press the 4 button.
The parameters recorded in the image
file appear.
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a different image.
To specify the parameters before
developing, refer to “Specifying the
Parameters” (p.274).
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.
Developing One RAW Image
MENU
OK
Developing Multiple Images
Developing a Single Image
OK
MENU
File Format
File Format
16
M
sRGB
sRGB
RAW
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
OK
100-0001
ISO
NR
272
Processing Images
8
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved
as a new image.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Continue] or [Exit].
Select [Continue] to edit other images.
8
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Continue] in Step 7, the screen for selecting the parameters
in Step 4 appears again.
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.
1
Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 4 on p.271 and
press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen appears.
Refer to p.238 for details on operations in the multi-image display screen.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW
images to be developed and press the 4 button.
Developing Multiple RAW Images
Cancel
Save as
MENU
Saves the image as a new file
RAW JPEG
OK
OK
Exit
Continue
Image developed and stored.
Continue developing?
OK
OK
273
8
Processing Images
3
Press the L button.
The development confirmation screen
appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Develop images as
shot] or [Develop images with
modified settings].
To change parameters, select [Develop
images with modified settings]. Refer to
“Specifying the Parameters” (p.274) for
details.
The screen to select a parameter appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to set [File Format],
[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality
Level].
You can select [JPEG] or [TIFF] for the file
format. If [TIFF] is selected, the
[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level]
settings are not available.
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The selected RAW images are developed
and saved as new images.
MENU
OK
OK
Develop images as shot
Develop images with
modified settings
OK
OK
RAW
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
MENU
File Format
File Format
JPEG
16M
Cancel
Save as
MENU
Selected images are saved
as new files
RAW JPEG
OK
OK
274
Processing Images
8
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.
The following parameters can be changed.
*1 This cannot be set when [File Format] is set to [TIFF]. (The setting is fixed to p.)
*2 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.
*3 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.337)
1
Press the four-way controller
(23) in Step 4 on p.271 to
choose the parameter you want
to change.
Specifying the Parameters
Parameter Value Page
File Format JPEG/TIFF -
Recorded Pixels
*1
p (4928×3264)/J (3936×2624)/
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)
p.200
Quality Level
*1
Z (Premium) / C (Best) / D
(Better) / E (Good)
p.201
Custom Image
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/
Muted/Bleach Bypass/Reversal Film/
Monochrome
p.222
White Balance
*2
F (Auto)/G (Daylight)/H (Shade)/
^ (Cloudy)/JD (Fluorescent Light
Daylight Color)/JN (Fluorescent Light
Daylight White)/JW (Fluorescent Light
Cool White)/ JL (Fluorescent Light Warm
White)/I (Tungsten Light)/L (Flash)/
f/K (Manual)/K (Color Temperature)
p.205
Sensitivity -2.0 to +2.0 -
High-ISO NR Auto/Off/Low/Medium/High p.98
Shadow Correction Off/Low/Medium/High p.214
Distortion Correction
*3
Off/On p.218
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
*3
Off/On p.218
Color Space sRGB/AdobeRGB p.212
MENU
File Format
File Format
16
M
sRGB
sRGB
RAW
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
OK
100-0001
ISO
NR
275
8
Processing Images
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.
Press the four-way controller (5 ) to display the setting screen for White
Balance and Custom Image.
3
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
• You cannot save the background image and use Digital Preview with White
Balance and Custom Image.
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the M button to
display the measuring screen.
Memo
276
9 Changing Additional
Settings
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ......................278
Formatting the SD Memory Card ......................281
Customizing Buttons and Dials ........................282
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display
Language ............................................................288
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display
.....293
Setting the Folder/File Number .........................300
Selecting the Power Settings ............................304
Setting the Photographer Information .............307
Setting the DPOF Settings .................................309
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS
Sensor (Pixel Mapping) ......................................311
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera
(Memory) .............................................................312
278
9
Changing Additional Settings
How to Operate the Set-up Menu
Perform general settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.
Perform the following settings in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way
controller (45) to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Refer to “Using the Menus” (p.42) for details on how to use the menus.
Set-up Menu Setting Items
Menu
Item Function Page
R1
Language/u
Changes the language in which menus
and messages appear.
p.292
Date Adjustment Sets the date format and time. p.289
World Time
Sets the display of the local date and time
of the specified city so they can be
displayed on the monitor in addition to the
present location when traveling overseas.
p.289
Text Size
Sets the text size of an item selected on
the respective menu screens.
p.293
Beep Switches the beep tone on/off. p.288
Guide Display
Sets whether to display indicators on the
monitor.
p.293
Status Screen
Sets the display color of the status screen
and control panel.
p.295
279
Changing Additional Settings
9
R2
Brightness Level Changes the brightness of the monitor. p.297
LCD Color Tuning Adjusts the color of the monitor. p.298
Video Out
Sets the output format when connecting
to an AV device with a video input
terminal.
p.257
HDMI Out
Sets the HDMI output format when
connecting to an AV device with an HDMI
terminal.
p.259
USB Connection
Sets the USB connection mode when
connecting to a computer.
p.317
Folder Name
Sets the naming system of the folder for
storing images.
p.300
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder on the SD Memory
Card.
p.300
R3
File Name
Sets the method used to assign file
names for images.
p.302
Copyright
Information
Sets the photographer and copyright
information embedded in Exif.
p.307
Auto Power Off
Sets the time until the camera turns off
automatically.
p.304
Select Battery
Sets the battery to use when the optional
battery grip (D-BG4) is attached.
p.305
Reset Resets all settings. p.335
R4
Pixel Mapping
Maps out and corrects any defective
pixels in the CMOS sensor.
p.311
Dust Alert
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS
sensor.
p.341
Dust Removal
Cleans the CMOS sensor using ultrasonic
vibrations.
p.340
Sensor Cleaning
Locks the mirror in the up position for
cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.
p.343
Format Formats an SD Memory Card. p.281
Menu
Item Function Page
280
Changing Additional Settings
9
[
R
Set-up 1] menu [
R
Set-up 2] menu
[R Set-up 3] menu
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Exit
MENU
234
English
Guide Display
Status Screen
Beep
3sec.
Standard
1
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name Date
Create New Folder
Exit
MENU
1 2 3 4
NTSC
±0
MSC
Auto
Copyright Information
File Name IMGP
Auto Power Off 1min.
Select Battery
Reset
Exit
MENU
123 4
[R Set-up 4] menu
Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Sensor Cleaning
Format
Exit
MENU
1234
281
Changing Additional Settings
9
Formatting the SD Memory Card
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused
or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.
1
Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Format].
3
Press the 4 button.
Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, the
screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Formatting deletes all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.
When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card
is “K-5”. When the X is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card is
recognized as a removable disk with the name “K-5”. (p.318)
Format
Cancel
Format
All data will be deleted
OK
OK
Formatting
Formatting
282
9
Changing Additional Settings
Customizing Buttons and Dials
You can set the functions for when the |/Y button, = button or
Preview dial is operated, or when the shutter release button is pressed
halfway.
For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front and
rear e-dials or | button are operated.
1
Select [E-Dial Programming] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [E-Dial Programming 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an exposure
mode.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[E-Dial Programming 2] screen.
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The screen for the selected exposure mode appears.
4
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select a function.
You can perform the following settings for
each exposure mode.
Setting the Function for the E-dials
E-Dial Programming
P
Tv Av P
Av
ISO
Av P
LINE
Tv
Tv
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Sv
Tv
Av
TAv
MENU
1 2
E-Dial Programming
P
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Tv Av P
Av
P
LINE
P
SHIFT
P
SHIFT
P
LINE
Tv
- -
- -
- -
- -
P
283
Changing Additional Settings
9
Exposure
Mode
R Front E-dial S Rear E-dial | Button
e
b
(Shutter speed)
c
(Aperture)
}e
(Return to e)
c
(Aperture)
b
(Shutter speed)
}e
(Return to e)
m
(EV Compensation)
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
eLINE
(Program Line)
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
m
(EV Compensation)
eLINE
(Program Line)
–––
K
–
o
(Sensitivity)
–
o
(Sensitivity)
––
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
o
(Sensitivity)
eLINE
(Program Line)
o
(Sensitivity)
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
eLINE
(Program Line)
m
(EV Compensation)
o
(Sensitivity)
–
o
(Sensitivity)
m
(EV Compensation)
–
b
b
(Shutter speed)
––
–
b
(Shutter speed)
–
b
(Shutter speed)
m
(EV Compensation)
–
m
(EV Compensation)
b
(Shutter speed)
–
b
(Shutter speed)
o
(Sensitivity)
o AUTO
o
(Sensitivity)
b
(Shutter speed)
o AUTO
284
Changing Additional Settings
9
c
–
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
––
m
(EV Compensation)
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
m
(EV Compensation)
–
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
o AUTO
c
(Aperture)
o
(Sensitivity)
o AUTO
L
/a
b
(Shutter speed)
c
(Aperture)
c
(Aperture)
b
(Shutter speed)
eLINE
(Program Line)
bSHIFT
(Shutter speed shift)
cSHIFT
(Aperture shift)
–
p
–
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
––
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
o
(Sensitivity)
–
M
–
c
(Aperture)
c
(Aperture)
–
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
c
(Aperture)
o
(Sensitivity)
cSHIFT
(Aperture shift)
–
Exposure
Mode
R Front E-dial S Rear E-dial | Button
285
Changing Additional Settings
9
5
Press the 4 button.
6
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
You can set the functions for when the |/Y button, = button,
Preview dial (main switch |) is operated, or when the shutter release
button is pressed halfway.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a button to set a
function to and press the four-
way controller (5).
The screen to set the function for the
selected button is displayed.
C
–
c
(Aperture)
c
(Aperture)
–
m
(EV Compensation)
c
(Aperture)
c
(Aperture)
m
(EV Compensation)
cSHIFT
(Aperture shift)
–
Setting the Function for the Buttons
Exposure
Mode
R Front E-dial S Rear E-dial | Button
Button Customization
RAW/Fx Button
AF Button
Preview Dial
Shutter Button Half Press
MENU
286
Changing Additional Settings
9
3
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a function.
The following functions can be assigned to each button.
Button Setting Function Page
|/Y
button
One Push File
Format
Temporarily changes the
file format.
p.203
Exposure Bracketing
Sets the Exposure
Bracketing.
p.157
Digital Preview
Displays the Digital
Preview.
p.138
Electronic Level
Displays the Electronic
Level on the monitor.
p.28
Composition Adjust.
Displays the [Composition
Adjust.] screen.
p.220
= button
Enable AF
The autofocus system
operates.
p.124
Cancel AF
Disables autofocus with the
shutter release button while
the button is pressed.
Preview
Dial
Optical Preview
Displays the Optical
Preview when the main
switch is turned to the
preview position (|).
p.135
Digital Preview
Displays the Digital Preview
when the main switch is
turned to the preview
position (|).
Shutter
release
button
pressed
halfway
Enable AF
The autofocus system
operates.
-
Off
The autofocus system does
not operate when the
shutter release button is
pressed halfway.
Off
(Live View only)
Only during Live View, the
autofocus system does not
operate when the shutter
release button is pressed
halfway.
287
Changing Additional Settings
9
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
288
9
Changing Additional Settings
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and
Display Language
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off, or change its volume.
By default, all available items are set to O (On), and the volume level is
set to [3].
The following items can be set.
•In-focus
• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)
•Self-timer
• Remote Control
• Mirror Up
• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format]
is assigned to the |/Y button)
• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when Change AF point is
enabled or disabled)
1
Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press the four-
way controller (5).
The [Beep 1] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to adjust the volume.
Select from six levels. When set to 0, you can turn all the beeps off.
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose an item.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[Beep 2] screen.
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Setting the Beep
Beep
Volume
In-focus
AE-L
Self-timer
Remote Control
Mirror Up
MENU
1 2
289
Changing Additional Settings
9
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
You can change the initial date and time settings, and set their display
formats. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the date
display format, and [12h] (12-hour display) or [24h] (24-hour display) for
the time display format.
Set in [Date Adjustment] in the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.278).
1 Setting the Date and Time (p.67)
The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.63) serve as the date and
time of your present location.
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.
1
Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select X (Destination) or W
(Hometown) for [Setting the
Time].
This setting is reflected on the date and
time that appear in the guide display and
control panel.
Changing the Date and Time Display
Setting the World Time
MENU
/
00 00
:
///
24h
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
//20100101
mm
dd yy
World Time
Setting the Time
Destination
London
Hometown
New York
MENU
16
00
:
10 00
:
290
Changing Additional Settings
9
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [X Destination] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a destination city.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the
region.
The location, time difference and current
time of the selected city appear.
6
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [DST].
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).
8
Press the 4 button.
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the [World Time]
screen.
9
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.291) for cities that can be selected as
a destination.
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to set the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the guide display if [Setting the Time] is set to X (Destination).
(p.24)
• When you switch [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output
(p.257) setting changes to the video output format for that city.
Destination
DST
London
Cancel
MENU
+06:00
16:00
OK
OK
291
Changing Additional Settings
9
List of World Time Cities
Region
City
Region
City
North
America
Honolulu
Africa/
West Asia
Dakar
Anchorage Algiers
Vancouver Johannesburg
San Francisco Istanbul
Los Angeles Cairo
Calgary Jerusalem
Denver Nairobi
Chicago Jeddah
Miami Tehran
Toronto Dubai
New York Karachi
Halifax Kabul
Central and
South
America
Mexico City Male
Lima Delhi
Santiago Colombo
Caracas Kathmandu
Buenos Aires Dacca
Sao Paulo
East Asia
Yangon
Rio de Janeiro Bangkok
Europe
Lisbon Kuala Lumpur
Madrid Vientiane
London Singapore
Paris Phnom Penh
Amsterdam Ho chi Minh
Milan Jakarta
Rome Hong Kong
Copenhagen Beijing
Berlin Shanghai
Prague Manila
Stockholm Taipei
Budapest Seoul
Warsaw Tokyo
Athens Guam
Helsinki
Moscow
292
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed.
The camera supports the following languages: English, French, German,
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
Set in [Language/u] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.278).
1 Setting the Display Language (p.63)
Region
City
Oceania
Perth
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
Setting the Display Language
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
293
Changing Additional Settings
9
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu
Display
You can set the text size of an item selected on the respective menu
screens to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
Set in [Text Size] of the [R Set-up 1] menu
(p.278).
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when
the camera is turned on or the exposure mode is changed. (p.24)
Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].
Set in [Guide Display] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.278).
Setting the Text Size
Setting the Guide Display Time
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 234
English
Guide Display
Status Screen
Beep
3sec.
Standard
Large
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 234
English
MSC
3sec.
10sec.
30sec.
Off
294
Changing Additional Settings
9
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button
is pressed.
1
Select [24. Save Menu Location] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [24. Save Menu Location] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Reset Menu Location]
or [Save Menu Location] and
press the 4 button.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed
1
Reset Menu
Location
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([A Rec. Mode 4]
menu when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie),
and [Q Playback 1] menu when in Playback mode)
is always displayed first. (default setting)
2
Save Menu
Location
The menu tab last selected is displayed first.
24.
1
2
Save Menu Location
Reset Menu Location
Save Menu Location
Pressing the menu button
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
accesses the last used
menu tab
295
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can set whether to display the status screen on the monitor and set
the display color of the status screen, control panel and playback mode
palette.
1
Select [Status Screen] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Status Screen] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Screen
Rotation] and use the four-way controller (45) to select
O or P.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Display Color]
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select from six display
colors.
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Status Screen Display
O Displays the status screen. (default setting)
P Does not display the status screen.
O
If the camera is held vertically while measuring the brightness, the
status screen/control panel is displayed vertically. (default setting)
P The status screen/control panel is always displayed horizontally.
Status Screen
Enable
Auto Screen Rotation
Display Color
1/
125 5.6
F
MENU
1
296
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can set the Instant Review display settings.
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select a display time.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge Instant Review].
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
When [Enlarge Instant Review] is set to O (default setting), you can
magnify the image with the rear e-dial (S). (p.237)
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Display for Instant Review
Instant Review
MENU
Display Time
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
Cancel OK
OK
1sec.
3sec.
5sec.
Off
297
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust the settings when the
monitor is hard to see.
1
Select [Brightness Level] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to adjust the brightness.
You can select from 15 brightness levels.
The value is reset to ±0 when the |
button is pressed.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor
MENU
Brightness Level
±0
Cancel OK
OK
+2
+2
298
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can adjust the color of the monitor.
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.
2
Adjust the color.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G)
and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)
and amber (A).
| button Resets the adjustment value.
Front e-dial (R) Displays a saved image in the background so
you can adjust the color while viewing the
image. This is useful for matching the color of
the monitor with that of a computer.
Cancel
LCD Color Tuning
LCD Color Tuning
MENU
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
±0 ±0
±0
OK
OK
299
Changing Additional Settings
9
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether the
camera is level, as indicated on the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel and monitor. Select whether to display the bar graph.
1
Select [Electronic Level] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Electronic Level Display
O
Displays the bar graph of the
electronic level.
P
Does not display the bar graph of the
electronic level. (default setting)
The bar graph can be displayed on the monitor when the M button is
pressed in the control panel. When [Electronic Level] is assigned to the |/
Y button (p.285), press the |/Y button while the status screen or Live
View is displayed to display the electronic level. (p.168)
Movie
Live View
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length 35mm
1234 5
Exit
MENU
300
9
Changing Additional Settings
Setting the Folder/File Number
You can select a naming system of the folder for storing images.
Set in [Folder Name] in the [R Set-up 2]
menu (p.279).
Creates a new folder on an SD Memory Card. A folder is created with the
number following the number of the folder currently being used.
1
Select [Create New Folder] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.
Changing the Naming System of the Folder
Date
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken are
assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is a
sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day) appears
according to the display style set in [Date Adjustment] (p.289). (default
setting)
Example) 101_0125: Folder for images taken on January 25th
PENTX
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
Example) 101PENTX
Creating New Folders
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Auto
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2 34
IMGP
NTSC
±0
MSC
Date
PENTX
301
Changing Additional Settings
9
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Create folder] and
press the 4 button.
A folder with a new number is created.
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] of [Memory] (p.312) in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu.
Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders
cannot be created consecutively.
Selecting the File Number Setting
O
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and
subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new
folder is created.
P
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each
time a new folder is created for saving images.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracketing shooting,
images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the
number of images exceeds 500.
Create New Folder
Cancel
Create folder
Creates a new storage folder
with the following name:
101 PENTX
OK
OK
302
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can change the file names of images.
The default naming conventions are as follows depending on the [Color
Space] (p.212) setting in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.301)
For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired
characters.
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned
in place of [IGP].
Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named
[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB.
1
Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [File Name] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Change] and press the
four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Setting the File Name
Color Space File Name
sRGB IMGPxxxx.JPG
AdobeRGB _IGPxxxx.JPG
File Name
Change
Reset File Name
Adobe
RGB
s
RGB
I M G P xxxx.jpg
_ I G P xxxx.jpg
MENU
303
Changing Additional Settings
9
3
Change the text.
Available operations
4
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish] and press the 4 button.
The file name is changed.
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
You can reset a changed file name to its default setting.
1
Select [Reset File Name] in Step 2 on p.302 and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Reset File Name] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Reset] and
press the 4 button.
The file name is reset.
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Rear e-dial (S) Moves the text input cursor.
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
Resetting the File Name
File Name
Finish
Cancel Enter
MENU
OK
Text selection
cursor
Text input cursor
304
9
Changing Additional Settings
Selecting the Power Settings
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain
length of time. Select from [1min.] (default setting), [3min.], [5min.],
[10min.], [30min.] or [Off].
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu (p.279).
Setting the Auto Power Off Function
• The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.
- when the Live View image is displayed
- when the slideshow is played back
- when the camera is connected to a computer with an USB cable
• If the camera turns off after the set length of time, perform one of the following
operations to reactivate it.
- Turn on the camera again.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, 3 button or M button.
Copyright Information
File Name
Auto Power Off
Select Battery
Reset
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
123 4
1min.
IMGP
3min.
5min.
10min.
30min.
Off
305
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can set the battery priority to the camera or the battery grip when the
optional battery grip D-BG4 (p.345) is attached.
1
Select [Select Battery] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Select Battery] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a battery to be
prioritized and press the 4
button.
4
When using AA batteries in the
battery grip, use the four-way
controller (23) to select [AA
Battery Type] and press the four-
way controller (5).
Selecting a Battery
Auto Select
Priority is given to the
battery with the most
remaining power. (default
setting)
Body First/
Grip First
Priority is given to the
selected battery.
Select Battery
Auto Select
MENU
Select Battery
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Auto Select
Body First
Grip First
Select Battery
Auto Select
AA Battery Type
MENU
AUTO
306
Changing Additional Settings
9
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the AA battery type and
press the 4 button.
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will
automatically detect the type of batteries
being used.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• If batteries are inserted into both the body and grip, the battery levels of both
are checked when the power is turned on. Regardless of the [Select Battery]
setting, both batteries are slightly used.
• When the currently selected battery runs out as a result of the check, the
message [Battery depleted] appears on the monitor. Turn the camera off and
on again, and the camera will switch to the remaining battery.
• You can check the battery usage condition on the status screen and LCD
panel. (p.52)
When the type of AA batteries inserted in the battery grip differs from the
battery type setting in Step 5, the battery level will not be correctly determined.
Please set the correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using [Auto-
detect]. However in low temperatures and when using batteries that were
stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate battery type so the camera
can correctly determine the remaining battery level.
Select Battery
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
AA Battery Type
Auto-detect
Nickel-Metal Hydride
Alkaline
Lithium
AUTO
AUTO
Ni-MH
AL
Li
307
Changing Additional Settings
9
Setting the Photographer Information
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are
automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You
can embed photographer information in this Exif.
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 3] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software (p.322) to check
the Exif information.
O
Embeds copyright information in the
Exif.
P
Does not embed copyright
information in the Exif. (default
setting)
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
MENU
308
Changing Additional Settings
9
4
Enter the text.
Up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols can be
entered.
Available operations
5
After entering the text, move the
text selection cursor to [Finish]
and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Copyright
Information] screen.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright
Holder] and enter the text in the same way as
[Photographer].
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Rear e-dial (S) Moves the text input cursor.
| button Switches between upper and lower case
letters.
4 button Enters a character selected with the text
selection cursor at the position of the text input
cursor.
i button Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.
Photographer
Cancel
Delete One Character
Enter
Finish
OK
MENU
Text selection
cursor
Text input cursor
MENU
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
309
Changing Additional Settings
9
Setting the DPOF Settings
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)
and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single Image] or [All
Images] and press the 4
button.
4
When [Single Image] is selected
in Step 3, use the four-way
controller (45) to select an
image to set DPOF settings.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.
MENU
All Images
Single Image
OK
OK
00
100-0105
100-0105
MENU
OK
Date
Copies Date
OK
310
Changing Additional Settings
9
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of
copies.
You can set up to 99 copies.
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].
6
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
select O or P for printing the
date.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF
settings for other images (up to 999).
7
Press the 4 button.
The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera
returns to Playback mode.
O The date will be printed.
P
The date will not be
printed.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,
the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the date for DPOF setting
is set to O.
• The number of copies specified in the All Images setting applies to all the
images, and that specified in the Single Image setting is canceled. Before
printing, check that the specified number is correct.
01
100-0105
100-0105
MENU
OK
Copies Date
Date OK
311
Changing Additional Settings
9
Correcting Defective Pixels in the
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)
Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels
in the CMOS sensor.
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Pixel Mapping] and
press the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped and
corrected, and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu
appears again.
When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power
remaining to activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) or change to the battery with ample power
remaining.
Pixel Mapping
Cancel
Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor
and corrects defective pixels
OK
OK
312
9
Changing Additional Settings
Selecting Settings to Save in the
Camera (Memory)
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned
off. The following function settings can be saved.
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose an item.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[Memory 2] screen.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Function
Default
Setting
Function
Default
Setting
Flash Mode O Cross Processing P
Drive Mode O Extended Bracketing O
White Balance O Digital Filter P
Custom Image O HDR Capture P
Sensitivity O Playback Info Display O
EV Compensation O File No. O
Flash Exposure Comp. O
[Memory] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to A.
O
Settings are saved even when the camera is turned
off.
P
Settings are cleared and returned to their default
values when the camera is turned off.
Memory
MENU
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
1 2
Custom Image
313
Changing Additional Settings
9
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the file
name even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number
Setting” (p.301).
• When the [R Set-up] menu is reset (p.335), all Memory settings return to the
default values.
Memo
314
10 Connecting to a
Computer
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to your
computer, install the supplied CD-ROM, etc.
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer ............................................................316
Saving Images on Your Computer ....................317
Using the Provided Software ............................320
316
10
Connecting to a Computer
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by
connecting the X using a USB cable and can be managed using the
provided software.
We recommend the following system requirements to connect your
camera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4” included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Windows
Macintosh
OS
Windows XP (SP3 or later), Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (can
be run as a 32-bit application on any x64 Edition of Windows.)
CPU
Pentium D 3.0 GHz equivalent or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo
processor 2.0 GHz equivalent or higher recommended)
RAM 2.0 GB or more (3.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB or more (8 GB or more recommended)
Monitor
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)
with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
Others USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
OS Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5, or 10.6
CPU
PowerPC G5 Dual-core 2.0 GHz or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo
processor 2.0 GHz or higher recommended. Universal Binary
format.)
RAM 2.0 GB minimum (4.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
Monitor
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)
with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
Others USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
317
Connecting to a Computer
10
Saving Images on Your Computer
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via the
provided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].
1
Select [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (
23
)
to select [MSC] or [PTP].
Refer to p.318 for details.
3
Press the 4 button.
The setting is changed.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Auto
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2
3
4
NTSC
±0
MSC
PTP
318
Connecting to a Computer
10
1
Turn your computer on.
2
Turn off your camera and use the provided USB cable to
connect your camera and your computer.
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera
and Your Computer
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to
the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard
for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without
installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP
without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the X
to your computer.
319
Connecting to a Computer
10
3
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card
with a volume label “K-5”.
If the “K-5” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open
folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.
4
Save the captured images to your computer.
Drag and drop the image file(s) or the folder containing the image files in
your camera to the hard disk of your computer or the desktop.
5
Disconnect your camera from your computer.
320
10
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Provided Software
“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included on the CD-ROM (S-
SW110). Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage
images saved on your computer, and develop RAW files taken with the
X and adjust the color of the images.
Compatible file formats: .bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in
PENTAX’s original RAW format)/.png (PNG)/.tif
(TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW file)
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.
When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on with
an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn your computer on.
Make sure no other software is running.
2
Place the CD-ROM (S-SW110) into the CD-ROM drive on
your computer.
The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.
Installing the Software
If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear
• For Windows
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW110)] icon.
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
• For Macintosh
1 Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW110) icon on the desktop.
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.
321
Connecting to a Computer
10
3
Click [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4].
For Windows, proceed to Step 4.
For Macintosh, follow the instructions
on the screen to perform subsequent
steps.
4
Select the desired language in
the [Choose Setup Language]
screen and click [OK].
5
When the [InstallShield
Wizard] screen appears in the
selected language, click
[Next].
Follow the instructions on the screen
to perform subsequent steps.
322
Connecting to a Computer
10
When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen
(browser) appears.
Browser tab set (default setting)
You can perform the file management functions such as viewing and
organizing the images.
1Menu Bar
This executes functions or makes various settings.
For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.
2Tool Bar
Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.
1
5
343
2
323
Connecting to a Computer
10
3Control Panel
Shooting information and settings of the selected image appear in this
panel. The set of tab pages displayed in Control Panel can be changed
by pressing the Browser, Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool
bar.
4File Display Pane
The file list and the images in the selected folder appear here.
5Status Bar
Information on the selected item appears.
Laboratory tab set (default setting)
The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.
324
Connecting to a Computer
10
Custom tab set (default setting)
The screen display can be customized here.
The Custom tab pages enable you to customize whether to show/hide
the various tab pages in accordance with your needs. By default, all tab
pages are displayed.
Refer to Help for details on using the software program.
1
Click the button on the Tool
bar.
Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.
Viewing Detailed Information on the Software
325
Connecting to a Computer
10
Regarding Product Registration
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.
Click [Product Registration] on the
screen in Step 3 on p.321.
A world map for Internet Product
Registration is displayed. If your
computer is connected to the
Internet, click the displayed country
or region and then follow the
instructions to register your software.
Note that you can only register online
if your country or area is shown.
Memo
326
11 Appendix
Default Settings ..................................................328
Resetting the Menus ..........................................335
Functions Available with Various Lens
Combinations .....................................................337
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................340
Optional Accessories .........................................345
Error Messages ..................................................351
Troubleshooting .................................................354
Main Specifications ............................................356
Glossary ..............................................................362
Index ....................................................................367
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................373
328
Appendix
11
Default Settings
The table below shows the factory default settings.
The functions set in Memory (p.312) are saved even when the camera is
turned off.
Reset Setting
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function
(p.335).
No : The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
[A Rec. Mode] Menu
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Drive Mode
9 (Single Frame
Shooting)
Yes
p.151
p.143
p.145
p.157
p.149
Flash Mode
Depends on
the capture mode
Yes p.77
White Balance F (Auto) Yes p.205
Custom Image Bright Yes p.222
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
USER Mode
*1
A1 Yes p.230
Exposure Mode
*1
e (Hyper-program) Yes p.230
File Format JPEG Yes p.202
JPEG Recorded Pixels p (4928×3264) Yes p.200
JPEG Quality
C (Best) Yes p.201
AUTO AF Point Setting 11 AF Points Yes p.127
Lens
Correction
Distortion Correction Off Yes
p.218
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Off Yes
Cross Processing Off Yes p.225
329
Appendix
11
Extended
Bracketing
Type Off Yes
p.160
Bracketing Amount
BA±1 (White Balance)/
±1 (other than White
Balance)
Yes
Digital Filter
Not use any filters
Yes p.162
HDR
Capture
HDR Capture Off Yes
p.215
Auto Align P (Off) Yes
Multi-
exposure
Number of Shots 2 times Yes
p.155
Auto EV Adjustment P (Off) Yes
Interval
Shooting
Interval 1 sec. Yes
p.152
Number of Shots 2 images Yes
Start Interval Now Yes
Start Time 12:00AM / 00:00 Yes
Composition
Adjust.
X-Y direction Center Yes
p.220Rotation ±0° Yes
Recall Previous Position
P (Off) Yes
D-Range
Setting
Highlight Correction Off Yes
p.214
Shadow Correction Off Yes
ISO AUTO
Setting
Sensitivity limit 100 – 3200 Yes
p.96
AUTO ISO Parameters
s (Standard) Yes
High-ISO NR Auto Yes p.98
Slow Shutter Speed NR Auto Yes p.99
Program Line k (Normal) Yes p.102
Color Space
sRGB
Yes p.212
RAW File Format
PEF
Yes p.203
Movie
Recorded Pixels
b (1280×720,
16:9, 30 fps)
Yes
p.171
Quality Level
C (Best) Yes
Sound g (On) Yes
Cross Processing Off Yes
Digital Filter Not use any filters Yes
Movie Aperture Control
Fixed Yes
Shake Reduction l (Off) Yes
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
330
Appendix
11
Live
View
Autofocus Method I (Face Detection AF) Yes
p.166
Show Grid Off Yes
Info Overlay O (On) Yes
Histogram P (Off) Yes
Bright/Dark Area P (Off) Yes
Electronic Level
P (Off) Yes p.299
Horizon Correction
P (Off) Yes p.140
Shake Reduction
k (On) Yes p.140
Input Focal Length
35 mm
Yes p.142
Instant
Review
Display Time 1 sec. Yes
p.296
Histogram P (Off) Yes
Bright/Dark Area
P (Off) Yes
Enlarge Instant
Review
O (On) Yes
Digital
Preview
Histogram
P (Off) Yes
p.136
Bright/Dark Area
P (Off) Yes
Enlarge Instant
Review
O (On) Yes
E-Dial
Programming
e
Rb, Sc,
|´e
Yes p.282
K
R
–,
So
,
|
–
b
Rb, S–, |–
c
R
–,
Sc
,
|
–
L/a
Rb, Sc,
|eLINE
p
R
–,
Sc
,
|
–
M
R–, Sc, |
–
C
R
–,
Sc
,
|cSHIFT
Button
Customization
|/Y Button
One Push File Format
Yes p.285
= Button
Enable AF
Preview Dial
Optical Preview
Shutter Button Half
Press
Enable AF
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
331
Appendix
11
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to A.
*2 The saved settings are reset only with [Reset USER Mode] in the [Save USER Mode]
screen.
Playback Mode Palette
*3 The parameters specified in [Digital Filter] are also reset.
Memory
Cross Processing,
Digital Filter, HDR
Capture
P (Off) Yes
p.312
Other than the above
functions
O (On) Yes
Save USER Mode
–Yes
*2
p.227
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Image Rotation – – p.249
Digital Filter Toy Camera Yes
*3
p.265
Resize
Maximum size
according to the setting
– p.262
Cropping
Maximum size
according to the setting
– p.263
Slideshow – – p.246
Save as Manual WB – – p.213
RAW Development
File Format: JPEG
Recorded Pixels: p
Quality Level:
C
Yes p.271
Index – – p.243
Image Comparison – – p.241
Movie Editing – – p.179
Protect – No p.254
DPOF – No p.309
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
332
Appendix
11
[Q Playback] Menu
[R Set-up] Menu
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Slideshow
Interval 3 sec. Yes
p.246Screen Effect Off Yes
Repeat Playback
P (Off) Yes
Quick Zoom Off Yes
p.236Bright/Dark Area
P (Off) Yes
Auto Image Rotation
O (On) Yes
Delete All Images – – p.253
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Language/u
According to default setting
No p.292
Date Adjustment
According to default setting
No p.289
World Time
Setting the Time W (Hometown) Yes
p.289
Destination (City) Same as Hometown No
Destination (DST) Same as Hometown No
Hometown (City)
According to default setting
No
Hometown (DST)
According to default setting
No
Text Size
According to default setting
No p.293
Beep
Volume 3
Yes p.288
Setting All
O (On)
Guide Display 3 sec. Yes p.293
Status
Screen
Status Screen O (On) Yes
p.295Auto Screen Rotation O (On) Yes
Display Color
1
Yes
Brightness Level
±0
Yes p.297
LCD Color Tuning
±0
Yes p.298
Video Out
According to default setting
No p.257
HDMI Out Auto Yes p.259
USB Connection
MSC
Yes p.317
Folder Name Date Yes p.300
333
Appendix
11
*4 The setting can be reset only with [Reset File Name] in the [File Name] screen.
[A Custom Setting] Menu
Create New Folder – – p.300
File Name
IMGP/_IGP
No
*4
p.302
Copyright
Information
Embed Copyright
Data
P (Off)
No p.307
Photographer –
Copyright Holder –
Auto Power Off 1 min. Yes p.304
Select
Battery
Select Battery
Auto Select
Yes
p.305
AA Battery Type
Auto-detect
Yes
Reset – – p.335
Pixel Mapping
– – p.311
Dust Alert
– – p.341
Dust
Removal
Dust Removal – –
p.340
Start-up Action
O (On) Yes
Sensor Cleaning – – p.343
Format – – p.281
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
1. EV Steps 1/3 EV Steps Yes p.120
2. Sensitivity Steps 1 EV Step Yes p.95
3. Expanded Sensitivity Off Yes p.95
4. Meter Operating Time 10 sec. Yes p.118
5. AE-L with AF Locked Off Yes p.131
6. Link AE to AF Point Off Yes p.118
7. Auto EV Compensation Off Yes –
8. Auto Bracketing Order
0 - +
Yes p.157
9. One-Push Bracketing Off Yes p.159
10. WB Adjustable Range Auto Adjustment Yes p.206
11. WB When Using Flash Auto White Balance Yes p.206
12. AWB in Tungsten Light Subtle Correction Yes –
13. Color Temperature Steps Kelvin Yes p.210
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
334
Appendix
11
*5 The saved adjustment value is reset only with [Reset] in the [26. AF Fine Adjustment]
screen.
14. Superimpose AF Area On Yes p.128
15. AF.S Setting Focus-priority Yes p.123
16. AF.C Setting Focus-priority Yes p.123
17. AF Assist Light On Yes p.124
18. AF with Remote Control Off Yes p.148
19. Remote Control in Bulb
Mode1
Yes p.116
20. Release While Charging Off Yes p.82
21. Flash in Wireless Mode On Yes p.191
22. LCD Panel Illumination High Yes p.37
23. Saving Rotation Info On Yes p.249
24. Save Menu Location Reset Menu Location Yes p.294
25. Catch-in Focus Off Yes p.134
26. AF Fine Adjustment Off Yes
*5
p.126
27. Using Aperture Ring Prohibited Yes p.339
Reset Custom Functions – – p.336
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
335
Appendix
11
Resetting the Menus
Settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up]
menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default
settings.
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the four-
way controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up
Menus
Language/u, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu
settings are not reset.
[Reset] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to A.
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Returns to default settings
OK
OK
336
Appendix
11
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default values.
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
Resetting the Custom Menu
Reset Custom Functions
Cancel
Reset
Returns the custom function
settings to default values
OK
OK
337
Appendix
11
Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses which have an
s
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default settings.
Refer to “Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.339) for other lenses and
D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than
s
.
z:
Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the
s
position.
# : Some functions are restricted.
× : Functions are unavailable.
Lens
[Mount type]
Function
DA
DA L
D FA
FA J
FA
*6
F
*6
A M
P
[KAF]
[K
AF2]
[KAF3]
[KAF]
[K
AF2]
[KAF] [KA] [K]
Autofocus
(Lens only)
(With AF adapter 1.7×)
*1
z
–
z
–
z
–
–
#
*9
–
#
*9
Manual focus
(With the focus indicator)
*2
(With matte field)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Quick-Shift Focus System
#
*5
××××
Eleven AF points/Five AF points zzz
#
*9
×
Multi-segment metering zzzz×
e (Hyper-program) mode zzzz
#
*10
K (Sensitivity Priority) mode zzzz #
*10
b (Shutter Priority) mode zzzz #
*10
c (Aperture Priority) mode zzzz #
*10
L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) mode zzzz #
*10
a (Hyper-manual) mode zzzz
#
P-TTL Auto Flash
*3
zzzz×
Power Zoom – z
*7
–––
Automatically obtaining the lens focal
length information when using the
Shake Reduction function
zzz××
Lens Correction function
*4
z ×
*8
×××
338
Appendix
11
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu. The
[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using the DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.
*6 To use an FA/F SOFT 85 mm F2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm F2.8 lens, set [27. Using
Aperture Ring] to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu. Pictures can be taken
with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with K
AF2 mount FA lenses.
*8 Only available with compatible lenses (FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited,
or FA 77mm F1.8 Limited).
*9 The focusing area is fixed to U (Center).
*10 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the
aperture ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom
use the K
AF2 mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler
use the K
AF3 mount.
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses
without an ultrasonic motor and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the K
AF
mount.
Refer to respective lens manuals for details.
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or
auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [27. Using
Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu.
Refer to “Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.339) for restrictions that
apply.
All camera exposure modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or
lenses with an s position set to the s position.
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses
not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.
Lens Names and Mount Names
Lenses and Accessories that Cannot be Used with this Camera
Lens and Built-in Flash
339
Appendix
11
When [27. Using Aperture Ring] is set to
[Permitted] in the [
A
Custom Setting 4] menu,
the shutter can be released even if the
aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is not
set to the
s
(Auto) position or a lens without
an
s
position is attached. However, some
features will be restricted as shown below.
Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other
than s
Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]
Lens Used
Exposure
Mode
Restriction
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens
only or with auto
diaphragm accessories
such as auto extension
tube K)
c (Aperture
Priority)
The aperture remains open regardless
of the aperture ring position. The
shutter speed changes in relation to
the open aperture but an exposure
error may occur. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with
diaphragm accessories
such as extension tube K)
c (Aperture
Priority)
Pictures can be taken with a
specified aperture value but an
exposure error may occur. In the
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the
aperture indicator.
Manual diaphragm lens such
as reflex lens (lens only)
c (Aperture
Priority)
FA, F SOFT 85mm, FA
SOFT 28mm (lens only)
c (Aperture
Priority)
Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value in the manual aperture
range. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
When the depth of field is checked
(Optical Preview), exposure metering
starts and the exposure can be checked.
All lenses
a (Hyper-
manual)
Pictures can be taken with a set aperture
value and shutter speed. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
When the depth of field is checked
(Optical Preview), exposure metering
starts and the exposure can be checked.
The camera operates in c (Aperture Priority) mode even if the mode dial is at
B, e, K, b or L when the aperture is set to other than the s position.
27.
1
2
Using Aperture Ring
Prohibited
Permitted
Shutter will release when
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
aperture ring is not set to the
"A" position
340
Appendix
11
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor
If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the
image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white
background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.
Dust adhering to the CMOS sensor is removed by applying ultrasonic
vibrations to the filter on the front surface of the CMOS sensor for
approximately one second.
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.
2
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Removal function is activated.
Set [Start-up Action] to O (On) to turn the
Dust Removal function on every time the
camera is turned on.
When Dust Removal is completed, the
camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.
Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations
(Dust Removal)
Dust Removal
MENU
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
Start
OK
341
Appendix
11
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and
visually displays the location of the dust.
You can save an image indicating the dust location and display it when
performing sensor cleaning (p.343).
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:
- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA or F lens that has an s (Auto)
position is attached.
- The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with an
aperture ring.
- The mode dial is set to any mode other than C (Movie).
- The focus mode lever is set to l or A.
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is
complete, dust will not be detected properly.
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be
detected properly.
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30
minutes from the time the image is saved. If more than 30 minutes elapse,
save a new Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.
• The Dust Alert image is saved only when an SD Memory Card is inserted.
342
Appendix
11
2
Fully display a white wall or other
bright subject with no detail in
the viewfinder and press the
shutter release button fully.
After image processing is performed, the
Dust Alert image appears.
If the message [The operation could not
be completed correctly] is displayed,
press the 4 button and take another picture.
3
Check the sensor for dust.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Alert image is saved and the camera returns to the [R Set-up
4] menu.
Rear e-dial (S)/
M button
Displays the Dust Alert image at full screen
display.
Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken with
specific shooting conditions.
Dust Alert
Checks for dust on the sensor.
Press shutter release button
to reveal dust location
Check
MENU
SHUTTER
Exit
Exit
x1
x 1
x1
OK
343
Appendix
11
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor
with a blower.
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve
a fee.
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning kit O-ICK1 (p.350) when
cleaning the CMOS sensor.
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
2
Turn the camera on.
3
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.
Removing Dust with a Blower
• Do not use a spray type blower.
• Do not perform Sensor Cleaning during Bulb shooting. The shutter may
accidentally close and may cause damage to the camera’s internal parts.
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the
lens mount cap on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power
remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when cleaning
the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC50, please install the
battery with ample capacity remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low
during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. In this case, stop cleaning
immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is
turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the
mirror.
• The self-timer lamp blinks, and [d] and [Cln] appear on the LCD panel
while cleaning the sensor.
• This camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS
sensor. It is not a malfunction.
344
Appendix
11
4
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Mirror Up] and press
the 4 button.
The mirror is locked in the up position.
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on
the sensor within the last 30 minutes, the
Dust Alert image appears on the monitor.
Clean the sensor while checking the
location of the dust.
5
Clean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a
blower with a brush may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS
sensor with a cloth.
6
Turn off the camera.
7
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original
position.
Sensor Cleaning
Cancel
Mirror Up
Raises mirror and opens shutter
for access to clean sensor.
Turn the power off to finish
OK
OK
345
Appendix
11
Optional Accessories
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Contact
a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with
the camera.
Battery Charger kit K-BC90 (*)
(Kit includes Battery Charger D-BC90 and AC plug cord.)
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90 (*)
AC Adapter kit K-AC50
(Kit includes AC Adapter D-AC50 and AC plug cord.)
Lets you power your camera from an AC outlet.
Battery Grip D-BG4
The Battery Grip has features such as a
shutter release button, front e-dial, rear
e-dial, and L button to
accommodate shooting vertically. In
addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI90, AA lithium/Ni-MH/
alkaline batteries can also be used in
the battery grip to power the camera.
Power Supply Accessories
The battery charger and AC adapter are only sold as a kit respectively.
346
Appendix
11
Auto Flash AF540FGZ
Auto Flash AF360FGZ
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are P-
TTL auto flash units with a maximum
guide number of 54 and 36 (ISO 100/m),
respectively. Their features include
slave-sync flash, contrast-control-sync
flash, high-speed sync flash, wireless
flash, slow-speed sync and trailing
curtain sync flash.
Auto Flash AF200FG
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit
with a maximum guide number of 20
(ISO 100/m). It features contrast-
control-sync flash and slow-speed sync
flash when combined with an
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.
Auto Macro Flash AF160FC
The AF160FC is a flash system
especially designed for macro
photography to take close, shadowless
pictures of small objects. It is compatible
with existing TTL auto flash functions
and it can be used with a wide range of
PENTAX cameras by using provided
adapter rings.
Flash Accessories
AF540FGZ
AF360FGZ
AF200FG
AF160FC
347
Appendix
11
Hot Shoe Adapter F
G
Extension Cord F5P
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Use the adapters and cords to use the
external flash away from the camera.
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
When using the AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this
large clip is used for setting the external
flash on a desk or table.
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
This viewfinder accessory is for magnifying
up to approximately 1.18 times.
When the eyecup is attached to the
X
with a viewfinder magnification of
approximately 0.92 times, the combined
magnification becomes approximately 1.09
times, making manual focusing much easier.
Magnifier FB
This viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying the central area of the
viewfinder 2×.
You can see the entire view by simply
flipping up the accessory from the eye-
piece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.
For Viewfinder
Hot Shoe Adapter FG
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
Magnifier FB
348
Appendix
11
Ref-converter A
This is an accessory that changes the
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°
intervals. The viewfinder magnification
can be switched between 1× and 2×.
Diopter correction lens adapter M
This accessory adjusts the diopter.
Install it on the viewfinder.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder
image clearly, choose one of the eight
correction of approximately -5 to +3m
-1
(per meter).
ME Viewfinder Cap (*)
Eyecup F
R (*)
Interchangeable Focusing Screen
AF Frame Matte MF-60 (*) AF Divided Matte ML-60
AF Scale Matte MI-60 Plain Matte ME-60
Ref-converter A
Diopter correction lens adapter M
M60
M60
M60 M60
349
Appendix
11
Connect to the cable release terminal
and operate the camera shutter release
button. The cord length is 0.5 m.
Used for Remote Control shooting.
Operating distance for remote control
From the front of camera: approx. 4 m
From the back of camera: approx. 2 m
Remote Control F
Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1
Camera Case O-CC90
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)
Cable Switch CS-205
Remote Control
Camera Case/Strap
350
Appendix
11
Use this kit to clean the optical parts
such as the CMOS sensor and lens of
this camera.
Body Mount Cap K
Hot Shoe Cover F
K (*)
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)
AV Cable I-AVC7 (*)
Sync Socket 2P Cap (*)
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1
Others
351
Appendix
11
Error Messages
Error message Description
Memory card full
The SD Memory Card is full and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or delete unwanted images. (p.55, p.84)
Data may be saved when you perform the
following operations.
• Change the file format to JPEG. (p.202)
• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG
Quality setting. (p.200, p.201)
No image
There are no images that can be played back
on the SD Memory Card.
This image cannot be displayed
You are trying to play back an image in a format
not supported by this camera. You may be able
to play it back on another brand of camera or
your computer.
No card in the camera
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the
camera. (p.55)
Cannot use this card
The inserted SD Memory Card is not
compatible with this camera.
Memory card error
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and
image capture and playback are impossible. It
may be viewable on a computer but not with this
camera.
Card is not formatted
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is
unformatted or has been formatted on another
device and is not compatible with this camera.
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.
(p.281)
Card is locked
The write-protect switch on an SD Memory
Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the
SD Memory Card. (p.56)
The card is
electronically locked
Data is protected by an SD Memory Card
security feature.
This image cannot be
enlarged
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot
be enlarged.
This image is protected
You are trying to delete an image that is
protected. Remove protection from the image.
(p.254)
352
Appendix
11
Battery depleted
The battery is exhausted. Install a fully charged
battery in the camera. (p.49)
Not enough battery
power remaining to
clean sensor
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50
(optional). (p.53)
Not enough battery
power remaining to
activate Pixel Mapping
Appears during pixel mapping if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50
(optional). (p.53)
Image folder cannot be created
The maximum folder number (999) and file
number (9999) are being used, and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.281)
Unable to store image
The image could not be saved because of an
SD Memory Card error.
Settings not stored
The DPOF settings could not be saved because
SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted
images and perform DPOF setting again. (p.84)
The operation could not be
completed correctly
The camera was unable to measure the manual
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try
the operation again. (p.208, p.341)
No more images can be
selected
You cannot select 100 or more images at a time
for Index (p.243) and Select & Delete (p.250).
No image can be processed
There are no images that can be processed
using Digital Filter (p.265) or RAW
Development (p.271) function.
This image cannot be
processed
Appears when you try to perform Save as
Manual WB (p.213), Resize (p.262), Cropping
(p.263), Digital Filter (p.265), or RAW
Development (p.271) for images captured with
other cameras, or when you try to perform
Resize or Cropping for minimum file size
images.
The camera failed to create
an image
The creation of an index print image failed.
(p.243)
Camera overheated.
Disabling Live View temporarily
to protect circuitry
Live View cannot be used because the
camera’s internal temperature is too high.
Press the 4 button and try using Live View
again when the camera has cooled down.
Error message Description
353
Appendix
11
Cannot start Live View
Appears if Live View is started when [27. Using
Aperture Ring] is set to [Prohibited] in the [A
Custom Setting 4] menu and the lens aperture
ring is set to a position other than s, or a lens
without an s position is being used.
This function is not available
in the current mode
You are trying to set a function that is not
available in B (Green) or C (Movie) mode.
Error message Description
354
Appendix
11
Troubleshooting
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it
back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery
out and put it back in again. Then, the mirror will retract when the camera
is turned on again. After these procedures are done, if the camera
operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service
center.
Problem Cause Remedy
The camera
does not turn
on
The battery is not
installed
Check if a battery is installed. If not, install a
fully charged battery.
The battery power
is low
Replace with a fully charged battery or use
the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional). (p.53)
The shutter
cannot be
released
The lens aperture
ring is set to other
than the s position
Set the lens aperture ring to the s position
(p.102) or select [Permitted] in [27. Using
Aperture Ring] of the [A Custom Setting 4]
menu. (p.339)
The built-in flash is
charging
Wait until charging is finished.
There is no available
space on the SD
Memory Card
Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space or delete unwanted images. (p.55,
p.84)
Recording Wait until recording is finished.
Autofocus
does not work
The subject is
difficult to focus on
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls,
etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidly-
moving objects or scenery shot through a
window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on
another object located at the same distance
as your subject, then aim at the target and
press the shutter release button fully.
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.132)
The subject is not
in the focusing
area
Position the subject in the focus frame in the
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is outside
the focusing area, aim the camera at the subject
and lock the focus, then compose a picture and
press the shutter release button fully. (p.130)
The subject is too
close
Move away from the subject and take a
picture.
355
Appendix
11
Autofocus
does not work
The focus mode is
set to \
Set the focus mode lever to l or A.
(p.122)
The focus
cannot be
locked
The focus mode is
set to k
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when
the focus mode is set to k (A). The
camera will continue focusing on the subject
while the shutter release button is pressed
halfway. If there is a subject that you wish to
focus on, slide the focus mode lever to l
and use the focus lock. (p.130)
The AE Lock
function does
not operate
The exposure
mode is set to B,
p or M mode
Set the exposure mode to any mode other
than B (Green), p (Bulb) or M (Flash X-
sync Speed).
The built-in
flash does not
discharge
The exposure
mode is set to B
mode
Only C (Auto Flash Discharge) and D
(Auto Flash+Red-eye Reduction) are
available for the flash mode when the
exposure mode is B (Green). The flash will
not discharge when the subject is bright in
these modes. In the exposure modes other
than B, only the flash mode that
discharges every time the flash recharges is
available. Try different exposure modes.
The USB
connection with
a computer
does not work
properly
The USB
connection mode is
set to [PTP]
Set [USB Connection] to [MSC] in the [R
Set-up 2] menu. (p.317)
Shake
Reduction
does not work
The Shake
Reduction function
is off
Set [Shake Reduction] to k (On) in the
[A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.140)
The Shake
Reduction function
is not set properly
If a lens for which the focal length
information cannot be obtained is used, set
the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]
screen. (p.142)
Shutter speed is too
low for the Shake
Reduction function
to be effective when
panning or shooting
night scenes, etc.
Turn off the Shake Reduction function and
use a tripod.
The subject is too
close
Move away from the subject, or turn off the
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.
Problem Cause Remedy
356
Appendix
11
Main Specifications
Model Description
Type
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with
built-in retractable P-TTL flash
Lens Mount
PENTAX K
AF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)
Compatible Lens K
AF3, KAF2 (power zoom compatible), KAF, KA mount lenses
Image Capture Unit
Image Sensor Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.7 x 15.7 (mm)
Effective Pixels Approx. 16.28 megapixels
Total Pixels Approx. 16.93 megapixels
Dust Removal
Image sensor cleaning using ultrasonic vibrations “DR II” with
the Dust Alert function
Sensitivity (Standard
Output)
AUTO/100 to 12800 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV or 1/
3 EV), expandable from ISO 80 to ISO 51200. Up to ISO 1600
in p mode.
Image Stabilizer
Type CMOS image sensor shift
Effective
Compensation
Range
Up to 4 EV (depending on the used lens type and shooting
conditions)
File Formats
File Format RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF2.0 compliant
Recorded Pixels
JPEG: p (4928×3264 pixels), J (3936×2624 pixels), P
(3072×2048 pixels), i (1728×1152 pixels)
RAW: p (4928×3264 pixels)
Quality Level
RAW (14bit): PEF, DNG JPEG: Z (Premium), C
(Best), D (Better), E (Good), RAW + JPEG simultaneous
capturing compatible
Color Space sRGB, AdobeRGB
Storage Medium SD/SDHC Memory Card
Storage Folder
Date (100_1018,101_1019...)/
PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...)
357
Appendix
11
Viewfinder
Type Pentaprism Finder
Coverage (FOV) Approx. 100%
Magnification Approx. 0.92× (50 mm F1.4 • ∞)
Eye-Relief Length
Approx. 21.7 mm (from the view window), Approx. 24.5 mm
(from the center of lens)
Diopter Adjustment Approx. -2.5 to +1.5m
-1
Focusing Screen Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing screen
Live View
Type TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Focusing Mechanism
Contrast detection + Face detection, Contrast detection, Phase
matching
Display
Field of View approx. 100%, Magnified view (= mode: 2×, 4×,
6×/\ mode: 2×, 4×, 6×, 8×, 10×), Grid display (4×4 Grid,
Golden Section, Scale display), Bright/dark area warning,
Histogram
LCD Monitor
Type Wide viewing angle TFT color LCD
Size 3.0 inches
Dots Approx. 921,000 dots
Adjustment Brightness and colors adjustable
Preview
Type Optical preview, digital preview
White Balance
Auto TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Preset
Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color,
N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten
Light, Flash, f, Manual, Color Temperature
Manual
Configuration using the display screen (up to 3 settings can be
saved), Color Temperature settings (up to 3 settings can be
saved), Copying the white balance setting of a captured image
Fine Adjustment Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis and/or G-M axis
358
Appendix
11
Autofocus System
Type TTL: phase-matching autofocus
Focus Sensor SAFOX IX+, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)
Brightness Range EV-1 to 18 (ISO100)
AF Mode
Single AF (l), Continuous AF (k)
Focus priority or shutter priority mode for l
Focus priority or FPS priority mode for k
AF Point Selection Auto: 5 points, Auto: 11 points, Select, Center
AF Assist Light Dedicated LED AF assist light
Metering
Type
TTL open aperture, 77 segmented metering, center-weighted
and spot metering
Exposure
Compensation
EV0 to 22 (ISO100 50mm F1.4)
Exposure Mode
Green, Program, Sensitivity Priority, Shutter Priority, Aperture
Priority, Shutter & Aperture Priority, Manual, Bulb, Flash X-sync
Speed
EV Compensation
Steps
±5 EV (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps can be selected)
AE Lock
Available via dedicated AE Lock button (timer type: two times
the meter operating time set in Custom Setting); Continuous as
long as the shutter button is halfway pressed.
Shutter
Type Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter
Shutter Speed
Auto: 1/8000 to 30 sec., Manual: 1/8000 to 30 sec. (1/3 EV
steps or 1/ 2EV steps), Bulb
Drive Modes
Mode Selection
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12s, 2s), Remote
Control (immediately, 3 sec., continuous), Auto Bracketing (2, 3 or
5 frames), Auto Bracketing + Self-timer, Auto Bracketing +
Remote Control, Mirror Lock-up, Mirror Lock-up + Remote Control
Continuous Shooting
Max. approx. 7.0 fps, JPEG (p•C•Continuous Hi): up to
approx. 30 frames, RAW: up to approx. 20 frames
Max. approx. 1.6 fps, JPEG (p•C•Continuous Lo): until
SD Memory Card is full, RAW: up to approx. 40 frames
Flash
Built-in Flash
Built-in P-TTL flash with serial control, GN: approx. 13 (ISO100/m)
Angle of view: equivalent to angle of view of 28mm lens (35mm
format equivalent)
359
Appendix
11
Flash Mode
P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain
Sync, High-Speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available
with PENTAX dedicated external flash.
Sync Speed 1/180 sec.
Flash Exposure
Compensation
-2.0 to +1.0EV
Capture Functions
Custom Image
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Noise Reduction Slow Shutter Speed NR, High-ISO NR
Dynamic Range
Setting
Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction
Lens Correction Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction
Cross Processing Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Digital Filter
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft,
Starburst, Fish-eye, Custom Filter
HDR Capture
Auto, Standard, Strong 1, Strong 2, Strong 3, Automatic
composition correction function
Multi-exposure
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9. Auto EV
adjustment available.
Interval Shooting
Capture Interval setting (1 sec. to 24 hr.), Start Interval setting
(immediate, designated time), Captures up to 999 images
Extended Bracketing
White Balance, Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adj, Contrast,
Sharpness
Horizon Correction SR On: adjusts up to 1 degree, SR Off: adjusts up to 2 degrees
Composition
Adjustment
Adjustment range of ±1.5 mm up, down, left or right (1 mm
when rotated); rotating range of 1 degree
Electronic Level
Displayed in viewfinder (horizontal direction only); displayed on
LCD monitor (horizontal direction and vertical direction)
Movie
File Format Motion JPEG (AVI)
Recorded Pixels
a (1920×1080, 16:9, 25 fps), b (1280×720, 16:9, 30 fps/
25 fps), c (640×480, 4:3, 30 fps/25 fps)
Quality Level C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)
Sound
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo microphone terminal
Recording Time
Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal
temperature of the camera becomes high.
Custom Image
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Cross Processing Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
360
Appendix
11
Digital Filter Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Color
Playback Functions
Playback View
Single frame, image comparison, multi-image display (4, 9, 16,
36, 81 segmentation), display magnification (up to 32x,
scrolling and quick magnification available), rotating, histogram
(Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/dark area warning,
detailed information display, copyright information display
(photographer, copyright holder), folder display, calendar
display, slideshow
Delete
Delete single image, delete all, select & delete, delete folder,
delete instant review image
Digital Filter
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Sketch Filter, Water Color,
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Base Parameter Adjustment,
Monochrome, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye,
Slim, HDR, Custom Filter
RAW Development
File Format (JPEG, TIFF), Custom Image, White Balance,
Sensitivity, High-ISO NR, Shadow Correction, Distortion
Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction, Color
Space
Edit
Resize, Cropping (Aspect ratio and Slant adjustment
available), Index, Movie Edit (Divide or delete selected frames),
Capturing a JPEG still picture from a movie
Customization
User Mode Up to 5 settings can be saved.
Custom Functions 27 items
Mode Memory 13 items
Custom Button
|/Y button (One Push File Format, Exposure Bracketing,
Digital Preview, Electronic Level, Composition Adjustment)
= button (Enable AF, Cancel AF)
Electrical dial customizable specifically to each exposure mode.
Text Size Standard, Large
World Time World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)
Language
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,
Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and Japanese
AF Fine Adjustment
±10 steps, uniform adjustment, individual adjustment (up to 20
can be saved)
Copyright Information
Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are
embedded to the image file.
Revision history can be checked using the provided software.
361
Appendix
11
Power Supply
Battery Type Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90
AC Adapter AC Adapter kit K-AC50 (optional)
Battery Life
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
740 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 980 images
Playback time: approx. 440 minutes
* Tested in compliance with CIPA standard. Actual results may
vary depending on the shooting conditions/circumstances.
Interfaces
Connection Port
USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible)/AV output, DC input, Cable
switch, X-sync socket, HDMI output, Stereo microphone
USB Connection MSC/PTP
Video Output Format NTSC/PAL
Dimensions and
Weight
Dimensions
Approx. 131 mm (W) × 97 mm (H) × 73 mm (D) (excluding
protrusions)
Weight
Approx. 660 g (body only), Approx. 740 g (including dedicated
battery and SD Memory Card)
Accessories
Package Contents
USB Cable I-USB7, AV Cable I-AVC7, Strap O-ST53, ME
Viewfinder Cap, Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90,
Battery Charger D-BC90, AC plug cord, Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110
<Mounted on the camera> Eyecup F
R, Hot shoe cover FK, Body
mount cover, Sync socket 2P cap
Software PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
362
Appendix
11
Glossary
AdobeRGB
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial printing. Wider
range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the color range so colors
only available when printed are not lost when editing images on a computer. When
an image is opened by non-compatible software, the colors look lighter.
Auto Bracketing
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button is
pressed, several images are captured. One has no compensation, one or
more are underexposed, and one or more are overexposed. This camera
features Exposure Bracketing that captures images in different exposures,
and Extended Bracketing that captures images with set White Balance,
Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness
levels.
AE Metering
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera, select
from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and [Spot Metering].
AF point
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select
from [Auto], [Select] and [Center].
Aperture
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.
Bright Portion
Overexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears white.
Camera Shake (Blur)
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and
raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the
camera. As camera shake is most likely to occur when pressing the shutter
release button, use the Shake Reduction function, Self-timer or Remote
Control shooting to prevent camera movement.
363
Appendix
11
CMOS sensor
Photography element which converts light entering through the lens into
electric signals that create an image.
Color Space
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,
[AdobeRGB], which supports a wider color gamut than sRGB, can be also
used.
Color Temperature
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and
to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.
Dark Portion
Underexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears black.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture value, lens focal length, and
distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture value
(higher number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture
value (smaller number) to decrease the depth of field.
DNG RAW file
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are
converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images
increases significantly.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily
be made by taking the images to a DPOF photo printing store.
364
Appendix
11
Dynamic Range (D-Range)
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.
This is the same as the term “Exposure latitude” used with silver halide
film.
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, overexposed and/or
underexposed areas are less likely to occur within the image, and when
the dynamic range is narrow, all image tones can be reproduced sharply
and accurately.
EV (Exposure Value)
Exposure value is determined by a combination of the aperture value and
the shutter speed.
EV Compensation
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed
and/or aperture value.
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Exif-JPEG format
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format is
based on the JPEG image data format, and allows thumbnail images and
image properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does not
support this format processes the image as a regular JPEG image.
Exif-TIFF format
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format is
based on the TIFF image data format, and allows thumbnail images and
image properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does not
support this format processes the image as a regular TIFF image.
Histogram
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents
the number of pixels. This is useful when you check the exposure level of
an image.
365
Appendix
11
ISO Sensitivity
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot
with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.
However, images taken with a high sensitivity are more susceptible to
noise.
JPEG
An image compression format. Although the image quality deteriorates a
little, images can be compressed to a smaller file size than with TIFF and
other formats. In this camera, select from Z (Premium), C (Best),
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited for
viewing on your computer or attaching to e-mail.
Mired
Proportional scale of measurement that consistently shows color change
per unit. Determined by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by
1,000,000.
ND (Neutral Density) Filter
A filter with many saturation levels that adjusts the brightness without
affecting the color tone of pictures.
Noise Reduction
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by
slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.
NTSC/PAL
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and China.
Quality Level
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the
compression rate rises.
366
Appendix
11
RAW data
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the
time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data
is 14 bit data that contain 64 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data. Rich
gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and use the
provided software to create image data with different settings, such as
JPEG or TIFF.
Recorded Pixels
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.
Shutter Speed
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changed
by altering the shutter speed.
sRGB (standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for
computer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the
subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially
blocked by the lens.
White Balance
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so
that the subject appears to have the correct color.
367
Appendix
11
Index
Symbols
| (Green) button .............21, 23
| (Preview) .........................135
[A Custom Setting] Menu
.......................................91, 333
B (Green) mode ...........71, 103
Q (Playback) button
...................................21, 23, 83
[Q Playback] Menu ....235, 332
[A Rec. Mode] Menu .....89, 328
i (Delete) button .............23, 84
[R Set-up] Menu ..........278, 332
E (Flash pop-up) button ...21, 79
m (EV Compensation) button
.................................20, 23, 119
A
AC adapter .............................53
Accessories ..........................345
Adding the date ....................310
AdobeRGB ...................212, 362
AE Lock ........................121, 131
AE Metering .................117, 362
L button ..........21, 114, 121
AF Assist Light .........19, 72, 124
= (Autofocus) ....................122
= button ..............21, 124, 286
AF coupler .............................. 19
AF Fine Adjustment ..............126
AF point switching dial ...21, 127
AF160FC ......................187, 346
AF200FG ......................187, 346
AF360FGZ ...................187, 346
AF540FGZ ...................187, 346
Aperture ......................... 93, 362
Aperture Priority Mode c ....109
Aperture ring ................102, 339
Aspect Ratio .................171, 263
Auto Bracketing ............ 157, 362
Auto Image Rotation ............ 236
Auto Power Off ..................... 304
Auto Screen Rotation ........... 295
F (White Balance) ......... 205
Autofocus = ...................... 122
Automatic sensitivity correction
............................................... 96
c (Aperture Priority) mode
............................................. 109
AV cable ............................... 256
AV device ............................. 256
B
p (Bulb) Mode ..................... 115
Base Parameter Adj (Digital
Filter) .................................... 265
Battery .................................... 49
Battery grip contacts .............. 19
Beep ..................................... 288
Bright portions .............. 214, 362
Bright/Dark Area warning ..... 236
Brightness adjustment ......... 214
Brightness Level .................. 297
Brightness of the monitor ..... 297
Built-in flash ........................... 77
Bulb Mode p ........................ 115
Button Customization ........... 285
C
Cable release terminal ........... 19
Cable switch ................. 116, 349
Calendar display .................. 240
Camera shake ...................... 362
Card access lamp .................. 19
Catch-in Focus ..................... 134
Center-weighted metering .... 118
Charging the battery .............. 49
368
Appendix
11
City names ...........................291
Cloudy (White Balance) .......205
CMOS sensor .......................363
Color (Digital Filter) ......163, 266
Color of the monitor ..............298
Color Space .................212, 363
Color Temperature
............................. 210, 211, 363
Composition Adjustment ......220
Computer .............................315
Continuous Shooting ............151
Contrast (Custom Image) .....222
Contrast AF ..........................166
Contrast-Control-Sync mode
(flash) ...................................196
Control panel ....................27, 40
Copyright Holder ..................307
Correct exposure ....................93
Creating folders ....................300
Cropping ...............................263
Cross Processing .................225
f (White Balance) ...........205
Custom Filter (Digital Filters)
.....................................163, 266
Custom Image ......................222
[A Custom Setting] Menu
.......................................91, 333
Customizing buttons and dials
.............................................282
D
Dark portions ................214, 363
Date Adjustment ..................... 67
Date change .........................289
Daylight (White Balance) ......205
Daylight-Sync shooting ..........81
DCF ......................................363
Default settings ....................328
Delete .............................84, 250
Delete all images ..................253
i (Delete) button .............23, 84
Delete folder ......................... 252
Deleting a single image .......... 84
Depth of field .................. 94, 363
Destination ........................... 289
Detailed information display ... 30
Developing RAW images ..... 271
Digital Filter .................. 162, 265
Digital Preview ..................... 138
Diopter adjustment ................. 61
Direct keys ............... 39, 88, 328
Display Color ........................ 295
Display language ................. 292
Distortion .............................. 218
DNG ..................................... 363
DPOF ................................... 363
DPOF settings ...................... 309
D-Range ....................... 214, 364
Drive Mode ............................. 88
Dust Alert ............................. 341
Dust Removal ...................... 340
Dynamic Range ........... 214, 364
E
E-Dial Programming ............. 282
E-dials .................................. 282
Electronic Level .............. 38, 299
Electronic level display ........... 28
Enlarging images ................. 237
Error message ..................... 351
EV ........................................ 364
EV Compensation ........ 119, 364
m (EV Compensation) button
................................. 20, 23, 119
EV Steps .............................. 120
Exif ............................... 307, 364
Exposure ................................ 93
Exposure Bracketing ............ 157
Exposure Mode .............. 45, 100
Exposure warning
............................. 108, 110, 112
Extended Bracketing ............ 160
369
11
Appendix
External flash .......................187
Extra Sharpness ...................222
Extract Color (Digital Filter)
.....................................162, 266
Eyecup ...................................61
F
Face Detection AF ...............166
File Format ...........................202
File Name .............................302
File number ..........................301
Filter .............................162, 265
Filter Effect (Custom Image)
.............................................222
Fish-eye (Digital Filter)
.....................................162, 266
Flash ..............................77, 181
Flash (White Balance) ..........205
Flash Exposure Compensation
...............................................82
E (Flash pop-up) button ...21, 79
Flash X-sync Speed ModeM
.............................................116
Fluorescent Light (White
Balance) ...............................205
Focal length ..........................142
Focus indicator ...............72, 132
Focus Lock ...........................130
Focus Mode .........................122
Focus mode lever ...........21, 122
Focus point ...................127, 362
Focusing ...............................122
Folder display .......................239
Folder Name ........................300
Format ..................................281
Four-way controller (2345)
.........................................22, 23
Frame rate ............................171
Front e-dial .......................20, 23
G
Green button ....................21, 23
Green mode B ............. 71, 103
Guide Display ................. 24, 293
Guide indicator ....................... 34
H
HDMI terminal ...................... 258
HDR (Digital Filter) ............... 266
HDR Capture ....................... 215
Help ...................................... 324
High Contrast (Digital Filter)
..................................... 162, 265
High dynamic range ............. 215
High/Low Key Adjustment
(Custom Image) ................... 222
High-ISO NR .......................... 98
Highlight Correction ............. 214
High-Speed Flash Sync mode
(flash) ................................... 189
Histogram ....................... 32, 364
Hometown ...................... 64, 289
Horizon Correction ............... 140
Hot shoe ................................. 19
Hue (Custom Image) ............ 222
Hyper-manual Mode a ........ 112
Hyper-program Mode e ...... 104
I
Image Comparison ............... 241
Image finishing tone ............. 222
Image plane indicator ............. 19
Index .................................... 243
M button
....................... 21, 23, 25, 29, 83
Initial settings ......................... 63
Initializing ............................. 281
Input Focal Length ............... 142
Installing software ................ 320
Instant Review ............... 73, 296
Interval Shooting .................. 152
o button ........................ 20, 95
ISO Sensitivity ...................... 365
370
Appendix
11
J
JPEG ....................................365
JPEG Quality ..................57, 201
JPEG Recorded Pixels ...57, 200
K
Kelvin ...................................210
L
Language setting ............63, 292
Lateral chromatic aberration
.............................................218
LCD Color Tuning ................298
LCD panel ..............................37
Lens ...............................59, 337
Lens Correction ....................218
Lens information contacts ......19
Lens mount index ...................19
Lens unlock button ...........20, 60
Live View ..............................165
Locking the exposure ...121, 131
Locking the focus .................130
U button .......................21, 168
M
a (Hyper-manual) Mode ......112
Macintosh .............................316
Main switch ................20, 23, 62
Manual focus \ .................132
Manual White Balance .........208
Mass Storage Class .............318
Matte field .............................133
Memory ................................312
Memory card ..........................55
3 button .............22, 23, 42
Menu operation ......................42
Menu page display ...............294
Meter Operating Time ..........118
Metering mode switching lever
.......................................21, 117
\ (Manual focus) ..............132
Microphone ....................19, 173
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........ 265
Mired ............................ 210, 365
Mirror ...................................... 19
Mirror Lock-up ...................... 149
Mirror Up .............................. 344
Mode dial ......................... 21, 45
Mode dial lock button ............. 21
Monitor ................................... 24
Monochrome (Digital Filter)
............................................. 265
Movie ................................... 171
Movie Editing ....................... 179
Movie playback .................... 177
MSC ..................................... 318
Multi-exposure ..................... 155
Multi-image display .............. 238
Multiple flash shooting ......... 195
Multi-segment metering ....... 117
N
ND (Neutral density) filter ..... 365
Noise Reduction ............. 98, 365
NTSC ........................... 257, 365
O
4 button ........................ 21, 23
One Push File Format .......... 203
Optical Preview .................... 137
Optional accessories ............ 345
P
e (Hyper-program) Mode .... 104
PAL .............................. 257, 365
Pastel (Digital Filter) ............. 265
PC/AV terminal .................... 256
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
............................................. 320
Phase Difference AF ............ 166
Photographer information .... 307
Picture Transfer Protocol ..... 318
Pixel Mapping ...................... 311
Pixels ................................... 200
371
11
Appendix
Playback ................................. 83
Q (Playback) button
...................................21, 23, 83
Playback display ....................29
Playback mode palette
.....................................234, 331
Playback time .........................52
Playing back images
continuously .........................246
Posterization (Digital Filter)
.............................................265
Power supply ..........................62
Press fully ...............................74
Press halfway .........................74
Preview ................................135
Preview Dial .........................286
Print settings ........................309
Product registration ..............325
Program Line ........................102
Program Mode e .................104
Protect ..................................254
Provided software ................320
PTP ......................................318
P-TTL (Flash) .......................193
P-TTL Auto (Flash) ...............188
Q
Quality Level ..........57, 201, 365
Quick Zoom ..........................236
R
RAW .............................202, 366
RAW Development ...............271
RAW File Format ..................203
|/Y button ............... 21, 286
Rear e-dial ........................21, 23
Recorded Pixels .....57, 200, 366
Red-eye reduction ..........80, 193
Remaining image storage
capacity ............................52, 58
Remote Control ............145, 349
Reset ....................................335
Resize .................................. 262
Retro (Digital Filter) ...... 162, 265
Rotate .................................. 249
S
Saturation (Custom Image)
............................................. 222
Save as Manual WB ............ 213
Save Settings ....................... 227
SD Memory Card ................... 55
Select & Delete .................... 250
Select Battery ....................... 305
Self-timer .............................. 143
Sensitivity ............................... 95
Sensitivity Priority Mode K
............................................. 105
Sensor Cleaning .......... 340, 343
Shade (White Balance) ........ 205
Shadow Correction .............. 214
Shake Reduction .................. 139
Sharpness (Custom Image)
............................................. 222
Shooting information .............. 25
Show Grid ............................ 167
Shutter & Aperture Priority Mode
L ...................................... 110
Shutter Button Half Press .... 286
Shutter Priority Mode b ...... 107
Shutter release button
................................... 20, 23, 74
Shutter speed ................. 93, 366
Sketch Filter (Digital Filter) ... 265
Slideshow ............................. 246
Slim (Digital Filter) ................ 266
Slow Shutter Speed NR ......... 99
Slow-speed Sync ................. 182
Soft (Digital Filter) ........ 162, 266
Sound ................................... 288
Speaker .................................. 19
Spot Metering ....................... 118
sRGB ........................... 212, 366
372
Appendix
11
Starburst (Digital Filter)
.....................................162, 266
Status display .......................295
Status screen .........................26
Strap ....................................... 48
Superimpose AF Area ....36, 127
K (Sensitivity Priority) mode
.............................................105
T
L (Shutter & Aperture Priority)
mode ....................................110
Text Size ........................64, 293
Toning (Custom Image) .......222
Toy Camera (Digital Filter)
.....................................162, 265
Trailing Curtain Sync ....184, 194
Tungsten Light (White Balance)
.............................................205
TV .........................................256
b (Shutter Priority) Mode ....107
U
USB Connection ...................317
USB Connection mode .........317
USER Mode .........................227
V
Vertical position ......................29
Video input terminal .............256
Video output format ..............257
Viewfinder ........................35, 61
Vignetting .......................77, 366
W
Water Color (Digital Filter) ....265
White Balance ..............205, 366
Windows ...............................316
Wireless flash control ...........193
Wireless Mode (Flash) .........190
World Time ...........................289
Write-protect ...........................56
X
M (Flash X-sync Speed) mode
............................................. 116
X-sync socket ....................... 197
Z
Zoom lens .............................. 76
373
Appendix
11
WARRANTY POLICY
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-
authorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized
374
Appendix
11
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the
service station to proceed with the servicing.
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory
rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the
warranty policy.
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.
375
Appendix
11
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,
which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We: PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
Located at: 600 12 Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera
Model Number: X
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: October, 2010, Colorado
th
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these
products.
Following the implementation by member states, private
households within the EU states may return their used
electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated
collection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your
old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the
environment and human health which could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you
wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don't
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed
on the home page of www.swico.ch
or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemicals involved.
Memo
Memo
Memo
Operating Manual
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
58192 Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
H02-201011 Printed in Philippines
HOYA CORPORATION
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe Imaging
Systems S.A.S.
(European Headquarters)
112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE
(HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)
PENTAX Imaging Systems
GmbH
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,
GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX Imaging Systems
Limited
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401,
U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, Arizona 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX Canada Inc. 1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
PENTAX Trading
(SHANGHAI) Limited
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
http://www.pentax.jp/english
For optimum camera performance, please read the
Operating Manual before using the camera.
Operating Manual
SLR Digital Camera
… 15 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Pentax K-5 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Pentax K-5 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 9,53 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Pentax K-5

Pentax K-5 User Manual - German - 1 pages

Pentax K-5 User Manual - Dutch - 419 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info